JP6048484B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

JP 11-333089 A

When the game ball to the startup port newly prize, the jackpot lottery is pending, then the predicted draw results jackpot lottery accompanying the new winning from the jackpot lottery pending is executed The actual jackpot lottery with the new prize will be held. Therefore, if the pending jackpot lottery is executed and if any of the lottery results is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that jackpot There is a risk that the gaming state changes before and after.

However , if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result do not match, if the performance (predictive effect) is performed using the prediction result, the lottery of the actual jackpot lottery There was a fear that there is a high possibility that a performance unrelated to the result is executed .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately handle the prediction result of the big hit lottery.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes display means having a predetermined display area, random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and acquisition of the random number information. Random number information storage means for storing random number information acquired by the means, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and a plurality of preset lottery conditions A lottery determination unit that determines a lottery result of random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit using one lottery condition, and a variation that is executed in the display area based on the lottery result of the lottery determination unit Fluctuation condition determining means for determining the type of game, and lottery conditions for setting lottery conditions for the lottery determining means when the special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determining means is completed A main control means for performing main control relating to the game, a means for performing variation display by the type of the variable game determined by the variation type determination means, and a predetermined suggestion to the player And a sub-control unit that is controlled by an instruction from the main control unit, and the main control unit includes the predetermined control unit for performing a specific effect over a plurality of variable games. When the start condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is determined, and the lottery when the random number information is determined by the lottery determination unit using the determined lottery condition a lottery result estimating means for estimating a result, when the predetermined starting condition is established a plurality of times, said sub-control estimation result indicating lottery results using a predetermined drawing condition estimated by the lottery result estimating means To determine the stage, the estimation information transmission means for transmitting the estimated information for each predetermined start condition of said plurality of times to the sub-control means, the condition information indicating a drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means Condition information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means receives the estimated information transmitted by the estimated information transmitting means of the main control means, and is specified from the received estimated information The condition information received by the result information storage means for storing the result information indicating the lottery result of the random number information using a predetermined lottery condition and the condition information transmission means of the main control means, and the received condition information The lottery condition information storage means for storing the lottery condition indicated by the lottery condition, the lottery condition used for the determination of the result information stored in the result information storage means, and the lottery condition And means for controlling the variable display means so that the specific effect is not performed when the lottery condition is different from the lottery condition stored in the information storage means.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the specific effect is to display at least predetermined suggestion information in the display area over the plurality of games.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the display unit having a predetermined display area, the random number information acquiring unit for acquiring random number information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the random number information acquiring unit Random number information storage means for storing random number information, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and one lottery condition among a plurality of preset lottery conditions The lottery determination means for determining the lottery result of the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, and the type of the variable game to be executed in the display area is determined based on the lottery result of the lottery determination means. And a lottery condition setting means for setting a lottery condition for the lottery determination means when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination means is completed. Main control means for performing main control related to the game, means for displaying the fluctuation by the type of the variable game determined by the fluctuation type determining means, and specifying over a plurality of variable games to give a predetermined suggestion to the player And a sub-control unit that is controlled by an instruction from the main control unit, and the main control unit, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, Lottery result estimation means for determining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means, and using the determined lottery condition to estimate a lottery result when the random number information is determined by the lottery determination means If, when the predetermined starting condition is established a plurality of times, the estimation result indicating lottery results using a predetermined drawing condition estimated by the lottery result estimating unit has to be determined in the sub-control means In the estimation information transmission means for transmitting the estimated information for each predetermined start condition of said plurality of times to the sub-control means, the condition information indicating a drawing condition set by the drawing condition setting means to the sub-control means Condition information transmitting means for transmitting, wherein the sub-control means receives the estimated information transmitted by the estimated information transmitting means of the main control means, and sets the predetermined lottery condition specified from the received estimated information. Result information storage means for storing result information indicating the lottery result of the used random number information and condition information transmitted by the condition information transmission means of the main control means are received, and lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information are The lottery condition information storage means for storing, the lottery conditions used for the determination of the result information stored in the result information storage means, and the lottery condition information storage means If the lottery condition is different from the drawn lottery condition, the fluctuation display means is controlled so that the specific effect is not performed. There is an effect that can be.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of claim 1, the specific effect is to display at least predetermined suggestion information in the display area over the plurality of games. Therefore, there is an effect that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the jackpot production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters and a storage ball storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the data contained in a prefetch command. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the data contained in a fanfare command. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the continuous notice determination table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the ending effect determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of an ending effect is determined in an ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of an ending effect is determined in an ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of an ending effect is determined in an ending effect determination process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which the display mode of an ending effect is determined in an ending effect determination process. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fanfare command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending effect based only on the prediction result obtained by prefetching. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending effect based only on the prediction result obtained by prefetching. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the problem which generate | occur | produces when determining the display mode of an ending effect based only on the prediction result obtained by prefetching. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which a continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process B which is a modification of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which a continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modification of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which a continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D which is a modification of the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the flow in which a continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation. "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the first symbol (special symbol) is drawn to determine whether or not it is a big hit Judgment (a jackpot lottery) is performed. In the jackpot lottery, if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot type, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

  “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a high probability state when the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds ends, and “2R probability variation jackpot” This is a probabilistic jackpot in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state when the maximum number of rounds is two. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a state in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a low probability state when the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds ends, and for a predetermined number of times of change (for example, 100 times of change) ) Is a jackpot that will be short-lived.

  The “high probability state” means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot is ended, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, a transition to the jackpot which is a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to play. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is normal and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball enters the first entrance 64. A game state that is easy to play. While the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of a big hit, the big hit lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased during probability change or in a short time, but instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 The opening time of the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 and the number of opening of the electric accessory accompanying one jackpot may be changed.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a change by indicating whether or not the change is made in accordance with the entry to the first entry port 64 (start winning prize) by a lighting state, or a stop pattern after the end of the change. As shown, the first symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is indicated by a lighting state, or the ball that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 (holding ball) ) Is the number of reserved balls, which is indicated by the lighting state.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (during high probability states, Low probability state, big hit, etc.) can be displayed. When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the LED 37a shows a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type, not a stop symbol indicating only the jackpot or not.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a liquid crystal display that displays the variation of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). (Hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") 3rd symbol display device 81, and 2nd symbol composed of LEDs that display the second symbol variably triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 A display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state according to the control of the main controller 110 described later is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display corresponding to the display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later becomes a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged.

  More specifically, if the lottery result is “15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot”, the variable display with the main symbols to which the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are added is arranged. If the lottery result is “15R normal jackpot”, a variable display in which main symbols to which “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, which are even numbers are added, is arranged. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of the range, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not arranged is performed. In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of place, there is a case where a continuous notice effect is performed that suggests (notices) that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot, In this case, when the variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, the main symbol combinations are “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left symbol row Z1 on the effective line L1). The so-called “chance” is always displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom (Y direction indicated by the arrow) with a periodicity and varies. Display is performed. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Alternatively, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a jackpot effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, and FIGS. 5B and 5C show display screens displayed in the ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect. FIG.

  In the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a big win lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and then the first symbol (special symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 has the first symbol display device. In response to the 37 variation display, the 3rd symbol variation display is performed.

  When the 3rd symbol variation display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, first, the 3rd symbol's high-speed variation display is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). When the time elapses, the display switches to the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are aligned is performed, the changing effect is ended, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out of place, if the main symbol (the third symbol) of the same number is not displayed, a stop display is performed and the fluctuating effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next jackpot lottery is performed and the next variation production is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is an effect for raising the player's expectation by informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be a big hit and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on while congratulating the jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot lottery is performed based on the start winning prize that is pending and the jackpot ends, the ending effect is notified to the player that the lottery result will be a jackpot in any jackpot lottery (confirmed effect display Or an effect for simply notifying the player that the jackpot is finished (performing normal display).

  When the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect, if the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning prize after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot in any jackpot lottery Expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, until the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result becomes a jackpot, the player can be relieved every time the jackpot lottery based on the pending start prize is performed. Even if the lottery result is out of the game, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  When the jackpot effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, the main controller 110 controls the sound lamp control in accordance with the timing at which the stop display of the third symbol is made. A fanfare command is transmitted to the device 113. Although details will be described later (see FIG. 9), the fanfare command includes information indicating a gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot. When the fanfare command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts the fanfare effect following the variation effect.

  Next, a round number command indicating the first round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect ends. When the number-of-rounds command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 starts a round effect corresponding to the first round following the fanfare effect. In the present embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 has won a jackpot, the jackpot state is continued until the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated a number of times (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to the jackpot type.

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). At the same time, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached, and a round number command indicating the second round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. After that, each time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Done. Thereby, each round effect from the 1st round to the round (2 rounds or 15 rounds) according to jackpot classification is performed in order.

  Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is all completed. When the ending command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the ending production, when the big win ends and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the pending start winning prize, the player is notified that the lottery result will be a big hit in any of the big win lotteries. Or the player is informed that the jackpot is simply over (normal display is performed). Although details will be described later, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether “final effect display” or “normal display” is performed in the ending effect.

  When “normal display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, “See you!” Is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The This screen means that the jackpot ends. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot is over, so that the player can be prepared to return to the normal game.

  On the other hand, when the “definite effect display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5C, “Super Chance!” Is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. This screen means that a lottery result will always be a big hit if any of the lottery lotteries on hold is made.

  When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the lottery result will be a big win if any of the lottery lotteries that have been put on hold is made after the jackpot ends. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  In addition, the player can be relieved every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes a jackpot after the jackpot ends. Even if the lottery result is out of the game, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  Here, returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of the second symbol performed in accordance with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is being executed by a lighting state. As the stop symbol after the end, the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second symbol is indicated by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is limited to 4 times or less, or 5 times (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. As described above, the first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  Therefore, if the number of balls that enter the first entrance 64 increases due to a short time, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, and as a result, even if a game is played, Or, it will be in a state where the possession is not reduced. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short-time state, the player can obtain a feeling of a period in which the jackpot can be obtained in a state where the number of possessions is difficult to decrease or in a state where the possessions are not decreased. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and the lottery result is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is set so as to become a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. While turning on, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot where a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. When the jackpot is reached, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is called.

  The special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64. Therefore, during the big hit, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that a lot of balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  The jackpot is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening When the ball 65a is opened, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is formed as a jackpot when the ball is opened into the specific winning port 65a for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. You may do it.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and display settings on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, display settings of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

  For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter used for the selection of the jackpot symbol C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for setting the display of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 26). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 receives the ball at the first entrance 64 (start winning). Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the big hit is set by the big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the value of the random number for the big hit set by the big hit random number table 202a. If it matches the value (hit value), it is judged as a big hit. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 that is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period in which the probability variation is not in progress), Two types of high-probability jackpot random number tables 202a2 used in a high-probability state (during probability change) are prepared, and the numbers of random numbers that are jackpots included in each are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between a low probability and a high probability.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first per-random number counter C1, the number of random-number values (hit values) that are jackpots at low probability is 3, and the values “7,307,582” are stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1. ing. On the other hand, the number of random number values (hit values) that is a big hit at a high probability is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390 , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the high-probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2. .

  In the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Here, if there is a value that is a winning value regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so that there is a possibility that the possibility of illegally winning a jackpot increases. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, depending on whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Further, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, And each counter value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired, and then a big win lottery is performed based on each acquired counter value, and the lottery result is predicted prior to the big hit lottery Has been. Hereinafter, it is described that the lottery result is prefetched to predict the lottery result prior to the jackpot lottery. In such pre-reading, each counter value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is used to predict whether or not the big hit lottery is successful and its type. The variation pattern type is predicted using the counter value of the variation type counter CS1. Hereinafter, the success or failure of the jackpot lottery and the result of predicting the type are described as the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the result of predicting the variation pattern type is described as the prediction result of the variation pattern type.

  In the case of predicting whether or not the jackpot lottery is successful in the look-ahead, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (winning value) are the same as in the case of the jackpot lottery. Is compared. Specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of winning a prize is a low probability state, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to, whereas if the gaming state is a high-probability state, it is for a high-probability time. The big hit random number table 202a2 is referred to. When the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value (win value) stored in the referenced table, it is predicted (determined) that the lottery result is a big hit. .

  The game of the pachinko machine 10 when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the fluctuating effect corresponding to the counter value are started after the prefetching (in some cases after a time interval is left). A jackpot lottery is performed based on the status. In the present embodiment, when the ball is awarded to the first entrance 64 (starting prize) during the execution of the variation effect or the big hit, the winning (starting prize) to the first entrance 64 is put on hold. This hold is made up to 4 times at maximum.

  If the starting winning prize is held when the variation effect or jackpot being executed is terminated, one of the oldest winning jackpot lotteries associated with the pending starting prize is executed. Similarly, while the start winning is being held, the jackpot lottery associated with the starting start winning is executed one by one each time the on-coming variation effect or jackpot ends.

  Therefore, when the ball newly wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning) and the start winning is already held, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery associated with the new start winning is pre-read, The jackpot lottery that has already been put on hold will be held before the jackpot lottery associated with the new starting prize is held. If a jackpot lottery that has already been held is performed and the lottery result is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes. Sometimes. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery with a new starting prize is performed in the changed gaming state, so the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to at the time of pre-reading and lottery are one. Even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the prediction result does not match the actual lottery result.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect Or, the stop symbol type (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. In this case, the stop type at the time of departure is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area, and the variation pattern at the time of release is determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and It is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those for the big hit. . In this case, the stop type at the time of jackpot is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area, and the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is the first hit type stored in the same holding area. It is determined based on the values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. A jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and a jackpot type table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There is a “15R normal jackpot” that becomes a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and a “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds.

  In the jackpot type table, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In this embodiment, the value “0 to 39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation big hit, and the value “40 to 79” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal big hit. A value “80 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of jackpot, the 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 It is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of stop type selection tables (not shown) in which the range of random values to be selected for the stop type is different for each table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. If the probability is low, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected to secure the time for entering the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table, a big hit variation pattern table used at the time of big hit and a deviation variation pattern table used at the time of loss are prepared. Also, as a variation pattern table for losing, depending on whether the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low-probability state excluding the time-short state, a variation pattern for losing (probability variation) A table and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table are prepared.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern table is divided into groups based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into common 15R jackpots that are referenced when 15R probability variable jackpots and 15R normal jackpots are determined as jackpot types, and 2R probability variable jackpots that are referenced when 2R probability variable jackpots are determined. Yes. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that is a big hit, according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same hold area, the hold area The variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is determined from the variation pattern for jackpot.

  Common to 15R jackpots are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. The correspondence with the value of the variable type counter CS1 is 0-10 for various types of normal reach, 11-99 for various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. 100-198. The various types of Nordreach are reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the 1st pattern (or 3rd pattern) is aligned (so-called bita-stopped pattern is aligned). The first pattern (or the third pattern) after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach that develops from the long reach or the normal reach), etc. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after time reach (for example, a reach that further develops after super reach or a special reach that develops from normal reach different from super reach). The 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, so that various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach can be selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for 2R probability variation jackpots, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 99 for 2R fluctuation A, 100 to 149 for 2R fluctuation B, and 2 to 10 for 2R fluctuation C. 150-198. The 2R variation A is an effect in which, for example, the final first symbol (or third symbol) is stopped at a specific symbol with “chicken”, and the 2R variation B does not normally appear. The final 1st symbol (or 3rd symbol) accompanied by “girl” is an effect that stops at a specific symbol. The 2R variation C is the final 1st symbol with the lighting of the one notification lamp described above. The design (or the 3rd design) is an effect that stops at a specific design.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  And, for example, in the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, when a complete deviation is determined as a stop type at the time of a deviation, only a complete deviation is referred to, and when a reach other than a front / rear deviation and a front / rear deviation is determined Are classified into groups (groups) based on the common reach and the stop type at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a big hit value (hit value), that is, a value that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state excluding the short time state, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is Determined from outlier (normal) variation pattern

  Dedicated to complete deviation includes short deviation in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time and reach is not established, and long deviation that is longer than the short deviation but in which reach is not established. The correspondence is 0 to 148 for short out and 149 to 198 for long out. In addition, for reach, the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short and the normal reach is various, the super-reach that is longer than the normal reach, the super-reach that is longer than the normal reach, and the special that is longer than the super-reach. There are various types of reach, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 148 for various types of outliers, 149 to 190 for various types of outliers, and 191 to 198 for various types of outliers.

  In addition, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table is referred to when a complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, as with the deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and there is a short deviation and a long deviation. Refers to when reach-only and reach reach other than front / rear reach and non-front / rear reach are determined, based on the common reach that has various types of out-going normal reach, various types of out-going super reach, and various types of out-going special reach, and the type of stop at the time of coming off The group is divided into groups (groups), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the game, when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, it is stored in the same holding area In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined from the deviation (probability change) change pattern.

  Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 148 for various types of outliers, 149 to 190 for various types of outliers, and 191 to 198 for various types of outliers.

  This out-of-progress (probability change) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, so that the ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64. Become. Therefore, if there are many extraordinary deviations in the short-time state or high-probability state, it takes time until the next variable display starts, giving the player a wait state, and giving the player discomfort. there is a possibility. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table. However, even if the gaming state is normal, a plurality of reserved balls (for example, In the case of 4 or more, 3 or more), the variation display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table. It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the above.

  Further, in the above-described variation pattern table for each deviation, when short deviation and long deviation are simply excluded, and the deviation is selected, the other probability is determined with reference to other tables. You may comprise so that it may select by. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. Major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and display setting in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 26), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 25) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a game state flag 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a held ball number counter 203c, a post-hit gaming state flag 203d, a big hit medium flag 203e, a pre-read execution flag 203f, and a big hit medium win prize flag 203g. And at least.

  The gaming state flag 203a is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state or a high probability state (during probability change). When the gaming state flag 203a is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, and when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Indicates. The game state flag 203a refers to the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 when the jackpot lottery is performed or when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. Used by MPU 201 to determine whether to do.

  Specifically, when the big hit lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is OFF, the big hit lottery is performed with reference to the low probability big hit random number table 202a1. On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Although details will be described later, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched, not only the state of the game state flag 203a but also the states of the after-hit game state flag 203d and the jackpot medium win prize flag 203g described later are taken into consideration. Thus, whether to refer to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or the high probability time jackpot random number table 202a2 is determined, the determined tables 202a1 and 202a2 are referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined. Read ahead.

  The gaming state flag 203a is set to OFF by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S714 in FIG. 25). Also, when a big hit is started in the pachinko machine 10, it is set to off (see S316 in FIG. 21). When the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a probable bonus jackpot, the gaming state flag 203a is set to ON when the jackpot ends (see S916 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, even if the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a jackpot, and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, even if the jackpot ends, the state of the game state flag 203a is not changed (FIG. 27). S915: See No). In addition, even when the big hit lottery is performed and the lottery result is out, the state of the game state flag 203a is not changed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery is performed and the lottery result is a normal jackpot, even if the jackpot ends, the state of the game state flag 203a is not changed. However, the game state flag 203a may be set off (overwritten) when the jackpot is over (see S915: No in FIG. 27). In other words, the game state flag 203a may be updated (reset) every time a big win lottery is performed.

  The holding ball storage area 203b is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 7). In each of these areas, a first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter storage area 203b2 that stores the value of the first per-type counter C2, and a stop A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1, and a winning game state flag 203a are stored as a winning game state flag. A winning game state flag storage area 203b5 is provided.

  In this embodiment, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, the variation type counter storage area 203b4, and the winning game state flag storage. Although the area 203b5 is provided in one reserved ball storage area 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided, and each of the five areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4, and 203b5 is one of the reserved ball storage areas. You may make it provide in.

  As described above, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the winning timing, and they are held in the holding ball storage area 203b. Stored in the area. In addition to this, in the present embodiment, the gaming state flag 203a is acquired at the winning timing, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored as the gaming state flag 203a as the winning gaming state flag. Stored in the reserved area. Here, the value stored in the holding area is used when prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and when performing the jackpot lottery. The prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be described later.

  In the reserved ball storage area 203b, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the game state flag at the time of winning) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is maximum. Memorize up to 4 times. In the case where data is stored, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). Remembered. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the older start prize is stored in time, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize is stored in the hold first area. If data is stored in all the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored even if the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution timing of the variation effect has come, the data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the game at the time of winning) Status flag) is shifted (moved) to the respective areas 203b1 to 203b5 of the execution area. Then, the data shifted to the execution area is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 22), and the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Here, details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 shifts the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved first area to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the execution area. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 in the hold first area is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 in the execution area, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 in the hold first area is disturbed. The numerical value is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the execution area, the random number value of the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the hold first area is shifted to the change type counter storage area 203b4 of the execution area, and the hold first area The state of the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 is shifted to the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 of the execution area.

  When the shift of each data to the execution area is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so the data stored (held) in other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) is stored. , Shift processing is performed to fill the reserved area with the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). In the present embodiment, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) where data is stored (held).

  For example, it is assumed that data is stored in all the holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) in the holding ball storage area 203b when the start of the variation effect is made (the holding ball number counter described later) The value of 203c is “4”). In this case, when the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the execution area and the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 stores the data in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area), respectively. , Shift to a reserved area (holding first area to holding third area) having a smaller area number. That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

  Further, for example, when data is stored only in the two reserved areas of the reserved first area and the reserved second area when the start of the variation effect is made (the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c described later). Is set to “2”), the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (holding 2nd area-holding | maintenance 4th area) may be shifted to the holding area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  The reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation effect (variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of balls on hold (the number of waiting times) up to four times. The reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S613 in FIG. 25). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls on the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S204 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time a changing effect is executed (see S306 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the held ball number counter 203c (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a held ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 20). The held ball number command is a command that is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a winning prize is detected and the held ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of suspensions of the variable effect that is retained in the main control device 110 by this retained ball number command. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of suspensions of the change effect without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The post-hit gaming state flag 203d is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state or a high probability state when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit and the big hit is finished. When the big jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state when the big jackpot ends, and when the big jackpot gaming state flag 203d is on, the jackpot ends. In this case, it is shown that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state.

  The jackpot after-game state flag 203d is used by the MPU 201 when a jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10. As will be described in detail later, when a jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, a fanfare command for notifying the start of a jackpot is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In that case, the MPU 201 generates the fanfare command based on the after-hit gaming state flag 203d. Although the details will be described later, the post-hit game state flag 203d is prefetched even when the lottery result of the big win lottery is prefetched based on the data stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b described above. The MPU 201 uses the data that has been acquired as a result of the winning prize during the jackpot.

  Then, the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S714 in FIG. 25). Further, the post-hit gaming state flag 203d is set to ON when the lottery result of the big win lottery is determined to be a big win and the jackpot type is determined to be a promising big hit (see S410 in FIG. 22). On the other hand, the post-hit game state flag 203d is set to OFF when the big hit type is determined to be a normal big win (see S411 in FIG. 22). In addition, when it is determined that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out, the state of the flag 203d does not change.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is determined to be a probable jackpot, or when the jackpot type is determined to be a normal jackpot, the state of the after jackpot game state flag 203d is set. The flag 203d may be configured to be set before the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot type is determined.

  The jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot. When the jackpot flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not jackpot, and when the jackpot flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot. The jackpot flag 203e is an MPU 201 for determining whether the winning has occurred during the jackpot or other than the jackpot when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). Used by.

  In the present embodiment, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), if the big hit flag 203e is on, it is assumed that the win has occurred during the big hit, and the ball is the first win. If the jackpot flag 203e is turned off when a winning (start winning) is made to the mouth 64, it is determined that the winning has occurred other than during the jackpot.

  The jackpot flag 203e is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S714 in FIG. 25). The jackpot flag 203d is set to ON when the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 (see S315 in FIG. 21), and is set to OFF when the jackpot ends (see S914 in FIG. 27).

  The pre-reading execution flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not to pre-read the lottery result of the big hit lottery for the new incoming ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. When the prefetch execution flag 203f is on, it indicates that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched for a new incoming ball. When the prefetch execution flag 203f is off, the lottery result of the big jackpot lottery is shown for a new ball. Indicates no prefetching.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the winning (starting winning) is held at the first entrance 64 has reached the maximum value (four times in the present embodiment), the ball enters the first place. Even if a new entry is made to the ball opening 64, no further start winnings are put on hold. That is, even if a ball enters the first entrance 64, the counter values (the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a) associated with the entry are not acquired. It is not held in the holding ball storage area 203b.

  The pre-read execution flag 203f is used by the MPU 201 to determine whether or not to pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for a new incoming ball when the ball newly enters the first entrance 64. Then, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, if the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, if it is not the maximum value), excluding the newly entered portion, the prefetching The execution flag 203f is set to ON (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, if the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is 4 (that is, if it is the maximum value) except for the newly entered ball, prefetching is executed. The flag 203f is kept off (see S203: No in FIG. 20). Further, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to off when the prefetch of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is completed after being set to on (see S516 in FIG. 23).

  In the present embodiment, the state of the prefetch execution flag 203f is set when the ball enters the first entrance 64, but the state of the flag 203f indicates that the ball has entered the first entrance. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be set by the time of the prefetch execution process (refer S107 of FIG. 19) mentioned later after entering into the ball opening 64.

  The jackpot medium winning flag 203g is obtained by winning the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 and the winning game state flag) that accompanies the winning (start winning) to the first entrance 64. It is a flag indicating whether it was acquired by a start prize in the middle, or it was acquired or obtained by a prize other than the jackpot.

  When the jackpot mid-winning flag 203g is on, it indicates that the data acquired with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 is obtained by the starting win during the jackpot, When the medium winning flag 203g is off, it indicates that the data acquired with the winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is acquired by a start winning other than the big hit. If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched, the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is prefetched by referring to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 or by referring to the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2. Used by MPU 201 to determine what to do.

  The MPU 201 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching based on the state of the winning game state flag (that is, the winning game state flag 203a) when the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is off. On the other hand, when the jackpot medium winning prize flag 203g is on, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be referred to in the prefetching are determined based on the state of the after jackpot gaming state flag 203d.

  More specifically, when the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is off and the winning game state flag is off, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to, while the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is off. In this case, if the winning game state flag is on, the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read.

  Further, when the jackpot mid-winning flag 203g is on and the post-hit gaming state flag 203d is off, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is referred to, whereas when the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is on, If the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is on, the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is referred to, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read.

  This jackpot medium winning flag 203g indicates that when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64, the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 except for the newly entered ball (that is, If the jackpot flag 203e is on (that is, the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot), it is set to on (see S210 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, when a ball newly enters the first entrance 64, the above-mentioned reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (that is, if it is not the maximum value), excluding the newly entered portion. Furthermore, if the jackpot flag 203e is off (that is, the pachinko machine 10 is not jackpot), it is set to off (see S211 in FIG. 20). When a new ball enters the first entrance 64, if the reserved ball number counter 203c is 4 (that is, the maximum value) except for the newly entered ball, a big hit The state of the winning flag 203g is not changed (see S203: No in FIG. 20).

  In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the state of the big hit / medium winning flag 203g is set, but the state of the flag 203g indicates that the ball is first. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be set after performing the prefetch execution process (refer S107 of FIG. 19) mentioned later after entering into the entrance slot 64. FIG.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery lottery result performed in the main control device 110 and the prefetching command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a (that is, the game state flag at the time of winning) ) And are stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b, the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern type are pre-read prior to the big hit lottery based on the acquired data.

  When it is predicted whether or not the lottery result is successful, first, one of the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 is determined for prediction, and thereafter, as in the case of the jackpot lottery, The value of the random number counter C1 per 1 is compared with the random number values (winning values) stored in the one table 202a1 and 202a2 used for prediction, and when either matches, the lottery result is a big hit Predicted (determined).

  In this embodiment, if the data acquired with the start winning is acquired by a start winning other than the jackpot, the gaming state at the time of winning is a low probability state or a high probability state. If the game state at the time of winning a prize is a low probability state, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is used to predict the success / failure. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning a prize is a high probability state, whether or not the winning is predicted using the high probability jackpot random number table 202a2 is used.

  More specifically, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is off and the winning game state flag in the data acquired with winning is off, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is used. If the winning and winning game state flag is ON, the winning probability is predicted using the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the data acquired with the start winning is acquired by the start winning with the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state at the end of the jackpot. Whether it is set or set to a high probability state is determined, and if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state at the end of the jackpot, the probability is predicted using the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 Is done. On the other hand, if the gaming state becomes a high probability state at the end of the jackpot, the hit probability random number table 202a2 for high probability is used to predict the success / failure.

  More specifically, when the jackpot mid-winning winning flag 203g is on and the post-hit jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is used to predict whether or not the jackpot winning game is achieved. If the state flag 203d is ON, the success / failure is predicted using the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2. The reason why the determination method of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is changed depending on whether the data acquired with the start winning is acquired by the start winning during the jackpot or the winning winning other than the jackpot Will be described later.

  Then, whether or not the lottery result is successful is predicted, and as a result, if it is predicted that the jackpot, a jackpot type is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the jackpot type table (not shown) as in the case of the jackpot lottery. Then, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, if it is predicted that the lottery result will be unsuccessful, the stop type at the time of decoupling is predicted. Even when the stop type at the time of losing is predicted, the value of the acquired stop pattern selection counter C3 and the value of the random number stored in the stop type selection table (not shown) are the same as in the case of the jackpot lottery. Are compared, and the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, when the variation pattern type is predicted, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is compared with the random number value stored in the variation pattern table, as in the case of the big hit lottery, The variation pattern type corresponding to the value of the counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, as described above, when pre-reading is executed in main controller 110 and whether or not, its type, and variation pattern type are predicted, a pre-read command including the prediction result is sent from main controller 110 as a voice. The lamp control device 113 is notified. The prefetch command will be described later. In the sound lamp control device 113, when a prefetch command is received, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed with respect to a series of fluctuating effects held at that time. When it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, the mode of the continuous notice effect is further set.

  Here, the continuous notice effect will be described. The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests (notices) that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the winning at the first entrance 64 (start winning prize) is likely to be a jackpot, The chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect over all the variation effects held at the time of winning. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 together with the suspended variation effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the suspended variation effects have ended. It can be held against. In this embodiment, when continuous notice effects are performed over all the variable effects held at the time of winning a prize, chances are displayed in each variable effect, but the same character or the same in each variable effect You may comprise so that the character relevant to a character may be displayed. Moreover, you may display so that the number of the same characters and the number of characters related to the same character may be increased every time each variation effect is performed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the variation effect different from the normal one has been performed, and thus can recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all of the variation effects that have been put on hold.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of a continuous notice effect is set for a suspended variation effect, when the variation effect ends in the third symbol display device 81, a chance symbol (for example, a diagram) On the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combinations of main symbols “3”, “4”, “1”) are displayed in order from the left symbol row Z1. Of the series of variation effects for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the last variation effect is not displayed as a chance symbol as a stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the chance pattern continuously as a stop symbol that appears after the variation effect is stopped. The player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed. In addition, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chances are displayed, so that the player is expected to be a jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. You can have it.

  Next, referring to FIG. 8, a prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main control device 110 prefetches the lottery result of the big hit lottery will be described. The look-ahead command is the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by the lookahead (whether the jackpot lottery is successful, the jackpot type for the jackpot, the stop type at the time of a break, the variation pattern type), and the lottery result in the lookahead Is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as “prediction precondition”), which is a precondition for the prediction. is there.

  In this embodiment, when this prediction precondition is a low probability state, it shows that the lottery result was predicted on the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. Specifically, it means that the main controller 110 uses the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 to predict the lottery result. On the other hand, when the prediction precondition is a high probability state, it indicates that the lottery result is predicted under the precondition that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. Specifically, this means that the main controller 110 uses the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 to predict the lottery result.

  FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the prefetch command. In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the left direction in the drawing is the upper bit direction of the data and the right direction is the lower bit direction of the data. In this embodiment, each command is composed of 2 bytes regardless of the command type, and data indicating the type of the command is stored in the upper 1 byte, and the lower 1 byte is stored in the lower 1 byte. , Data serving as a parameter of the command is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, data indicating that the command is a prefetch command is stored in the upper 1 byte of the prefetch command, and data serving as a parameter of the prefetch command is stored in the lower 1 byte. Has been.

  More specifically, the prefetch prediction prerequisite is indicated by the most significant bit among the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte. The prediction result of the big hit lottery is indicated by the lower 3 bits following the most significant bit, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type is indicated by the lower 3 bits following the 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery. Indicated. Other information is shown for the least significant 1 bit.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), the prefetching prediction precondition indicates that if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates a low probability state. If “1” is stored, it indicates a high probability state. In other words, if the most significant bit of the lower byte is “0”, it means that the lottery result is predicted using the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 in the main controller 110, and the lowest byte When the high order bit is “1”, it means that the lottery result is predicted by using the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 in the main controller 110.

  Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1, 202a2 is used for the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “complete out” that does not reach if “000” is stored in the lower 3 bits following the most significant bit of the lower byte. Show. Similarly, if “001” is stored, it indicates “front / rear out” that generates a front / rear out of reach, and if “010” is stored, a reach other than “out of front / back” is generated. "011" is stored, "15R normal jackpot" is stored, "100" is stored, "2 probability variable jackpot" is displayed, If “101” is stored, it indicates “15R probability variation jackpot”.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b3), the prediction result of the variation pattern type stores “000” in the lower 3 bits following the 3 bits indicating the prediction result of the big win lottery in the lower 1 byte of the prefetch command. If it is, it means that it is out (short out). Similarly, if “001” is stored, it indicates that it is out (long out), if “010” is stored, it indicates normal reach, and if “011” is stored, it is super reach. If “100” is stored, it indicates a special reach.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning is detected, the main control device 110 executes the prefetch process, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch is included in the prefetch command. By transmitting to the lamp control device 113, more various controls can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  In this embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach are configured to include both the case of a big win and the case of a loss, but each reach in the case of a big win and each reach in the case of a loss You may comprise so that it may divide. Each reach in the case of jackpot and each reach in the case of losing are configured separately, and further, the execution determination of the continuous notice effect in the sound lamp control device 113 is also taken into account the prediction result of the variation pattern type. If constituted so, the execution judgment of the continuous notice effect can be performed under more detailed conditions by increasing the types of prediction results of the variation pattern type notified by the prefetch command. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the control that requires prefetching, it is possible to make the control in the sound lamp control device 113 more diverse.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-read command does not merely notify the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110 that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a losing or a big winning, but in the case of losing, the “completely losing” ”,“ Front / rear out of reach ”, or“ reach other than out of front / rear out of reach ”, and in the case of a big hit, notify whether“ 15R normal big hit ”,“ 2R probability variable big hit ”, or“ 15R probability big hit ” Yes. Thereby, compared with the case where it is simply notified as a prediction result of the jackpot lottery whether it is a losing or a jackpot, the audio lamp control device 113 can perform the execution determination of the continuous notice effect described later under more detailed conditions. This makes it possible to diversify controls that require prefetching. Therefore, the control in the sound lamp control device 113 can be performed in various ways.

  In this embodiment, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of 15R normal big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, and 15R probability big hit. Although the prefetch command is configured, the prefetch command may be configured to simply notify that it is a big hit. Further, according to the maximum number of rounds that occur during the jackpot, the main controller 110 is divided into “15R jackpot” (15R regular jackpot and 15R probability variation jackpot) and “2R jackpot” (2R probability variation jackpot). The prefetch command may be configured to notify the audio lamp control device 113 from Or, depending on whether or not the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot is a high probability state, it is divided into “probable jackpot” (15R probability jackpot and 2R probability jackpot) and “normal jackpot” (15R regular jackpot) The prefetch command may be configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery is out of place, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 that it is divided into complete disengagement, front / rear disengagement reach, and reach other than disengagement. Although the prefetch command is configured, the prefetch command may be configured so as to simply notify that it is off. In addition, the prefetch command may be configured according to whether the reach is to be generated or to be completely out of reach. If the information content notified to the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced as compared with the case of the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing based on the jackpot lottery prediction result of the present embodiment. It can be simplified more than the case. Therefore, in this case, while the audio lamp control device 113 performs the control related to the prefetching, an increase in the control load related to the prefetching can be suppressed, and the processing capability of the audio lamp control device 113 can be directed to other controls. . Therefore, while performing control by prefetching, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require prefetching.

  Further, if the information content notified to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is simply reduced to “hit” or “out”, the sound lamp control device 113 is reduced. Then, the process based on the jackpot lottery prediction result can be simplified as compared with the case of the present embodiment. Therefore, in this case, while the audio lamp control device 113 performs the control related to the prefetching, an increase in the control load related to the prefetching can be suppressed, and the processing capability of the audio lamp control device 113 can be directed to other controls. . Therefore, while performing control by prefetching, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects that do not require prefetching.

  Next, referring to FIG. 9, a fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main control device 110 has won a big win lottery result will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data included in the fanfare command. As in the case of FIG. 8, in FIG. 9, the left direction is the upper bit direction of the data and the right direction is the lower bit direction of the data. Of the command composed of 2 bytes, data indicating the type of the command is stored in the upper 1 byte, and data as a parameter of the command is stored in the lower 1 byte.

  As described above, the fanfare command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot. . Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and then the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare command is sent from the main controller 110. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the present embodiment, information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is included in the fanfare command, and the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command from the fanfare command. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is acquired. Although the details will be described later, the gaming state acquired here is referred to when the sound lamp control device 113 determines a display mode for performing “determined effect display” or “normal display” in the ending effect. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, data indicating that the command is a fanfare command is stored in the upper 1 byte of the fanfare command, and data serving as a parameter of the fanfare command is stored in the lower 1 byte. Has been.

  Specifically, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is indicated by the most significant bit among the 8 bits constituting the lower 1 byte. That is, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is shown. The other 7 bits on the lower side following the most significant bit indicate other information. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), if “0” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “low probability state” at the end of the current jackpot. If “1” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “high probability state” at the end of the current jackpot.

  Then, when a fanfare command is generated in the main controller 110, if the above jackpot after gaming state flag 203d is off, "0" is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte, and the jackpot after gaming state flag 203d If is on, “1” is stored in the most significant bit of the lower byte.

  In the present embodiment, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by the fanfare command. The game controller set to the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot may be notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by a pattern command, stop type command, round number command, or ending command. . That is, the main controller 110 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and after the jackpot type is determined, until the sound lamp controller 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a command for notifying the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by the fanfare command. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a stop type command notified from the control device 110, it is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is. The gaming state may be determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

  That is, in the main control device 110, when the big hit lottery is performed, the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern, and the determined stop type Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Shows whether it is a big hit. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, it can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is. .

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a continuous notice determination table 222a. Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a pre-read information storage area 223a, a reserved ball number counter 223b, a big hit after game state flag 223c, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and an ending state counter 223f, a continuous notice lottery counter 223g, a continuous notice number counter 223h, and a post-notice big hit flag 223i are provided. For convenience of explanation, the continuous notice determination table 222a in the ROM 222 will be described after the continuous notice lottery counter 223g in the RAM 223 is explained.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is an area for storing various types of information (prefetching prediction preconditions, jackpot lottery prediction results, fluctuation pattern type prediction results) notified from the main controller 110 by the above-described prefetching command. is there.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The prefetch information storage area 223a has five areas of one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas is provided with at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery described above, and the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 includes information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type described above. It is an area for storing. The prediction precondition storage area 223a3 is an area for storing information indicating the above-described prefetch prediction precondition. Each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is initialized in the initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) of the RAM that is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is cleared to zero.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110, various information (prefetching prediction precondition, jackpot lottery prediction result, and fluctuation pattern type prediction result) from the prefetching command is received. Is extracted as prefetch information, and the extracted prefetch information is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Although details will be described later, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control device pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery, only the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are controlled by the sound lamp control. The device was not notified. However, in the present embodiment, when the main controller 110 prefetches the lottery lottery result, in addition to the jackpot lottery prediction result and the prediction result of the variation pattern type, in addition to the prediction preconditions for the prefetching Is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and each piece of information is stored in the same reserved area in the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Therefore, for each holding area, referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the same holding area and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are as follows: It is possible to determine what kind of prediction precondition is prefetched. That is, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 and 202a2 is used for the prefetching in the main controller 110.

  When the extracted prefetch information is stored in the reserved area, the area number (first to fourth) of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) is vacant. Data is stored in order from the smallest area. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the older start prize is stored in time, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize is stored in the hold first area.

  More specifically, the big hit lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 stores the same data (see FIG. 8 (b2)) as the data indicating the big hit lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command. Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetch command is completely out of place, “000” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Similarly, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is out of front and back reach, “001” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is reach other than out of front and back, the jackpot lottery When “010” is stored in the prediction result storage area 223a1 and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is 15R normal jackpot, “011” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is In the case of 2R probability variation jackpot, “100” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, and when the prediction result of jackpot lottery is 15R probability variation jackpot, “101” is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1. Is stored.

  Similarly, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 stores the same data (see FIG. 8 (b3)) as the data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type included in the prefetch command. Specifically, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type indicated by the prefetch command is out (short out), “000” is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2. Similarly, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is out (long), “001” is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, When the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 stores “010” and the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 stores “011”. If the type prediction result is special reach, “100” is stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2.

  Similarly, in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, the same data (see FIG. 8 (b1)) as the data indicating the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command is stored. Specifically, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in a low probability state, “0” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3. Similarly, when the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command is in a high probability state, “1” is stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In the present embodiment, the same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage area 223a3, The same data as the data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the same data as the data indicating the prediction precondition for the prefetch, the information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the prediction of the prefetch Although it is stored as information indicating the precondition, it is not necessarily limited to this, the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command, the data indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, the precondition of the prefetch prediction Convert the data shown to another data, and then convert the converted data As the information indicating the prediction result of the random lottery, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the information indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and the prediction precondition storage You may store in area 223a3.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a to the execution area. . Specifically, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the holding first area is shifted to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1 of the execution area. Similarly, the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the hold first area is shifted to the change pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2 of the execution area, and the hold first The prediction precondition stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the area is shifted to the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area.

  When the data shift to the execution area is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so the data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) Shift processing is performed to fill the reserved area smaller by 1 (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). In this embodiment, in the prefetch information storage area 223a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) where data is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (holding 2nd area-holding | maintenance 4th area) may be shifted to the holding area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  In addition, as described above, the pre-read information storage area 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 includes one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area), similarly to the holding ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110. ~ Reserved fourth area). This is because data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. That is, the pre-read information corresponding to the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. Similarly, pre-read information corresponding to the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203b is stored in the hold first area of the pre-read information storage area 223a, and a hold ball is stored in the hold second area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. Prefetch information corresponding to the reserved second area of the storage area 203b is stored, and prefetch information corresponding to the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved third area of the prefetched information storage area 223a. The pre-read information corresponding to the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the reserved fourth area of the information storage area 223a.

  Although details will be described later, when the ball newly wins (start winning) at the first entrance, the data related to the new start winning is acquired in the main controller 110, and the data is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Are newly stored in the reserved area, and the start winning is pre-read. Then, a prefetch command including various pieces of information (prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetching and a precondition for the prefetching prediction is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The When the pre-read command is received in the sound lamp control device 113, various information and prediction preconditions are extracted as pre-read information from the pre-read command, and the pre-read information is newly stored in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. (See S1210 in FIG. 31). In this way, each time a ball newly wins (start winning) at the first entrance, the data accompanying the start winning is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 and the voice lamp control device. The pre-read information storage area 223a 113 is stored in the reserved area.

  Further, when the big hit lottery is newly started in the main controller 110, a shift process is performed for each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (see 307 in FIG. 21). Then, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, a change pattern command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 along with the big hit lottery. When the variation pattern command is received by the sound lamp control device 113 and the variation display is set, a shift process is performed for each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (see S1506 in FIG. 38). Thus, each time the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the sound lamp control device 113, respectively. Shift processing is performed. Accordingly, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the sound lamp control device 113.

  The above-described prefetch information storage area 223a is referred to when determining whether or not to perform a continuous notice effect. When the sound lamp control device 113 stores new prefetch information in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in response to the reception of the prefetch command described above, the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a and a later-described prefetch information are stored. Based on the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is performed for a series of variable effects held at that time.

  The prefetch information storage area 223a is also referred to when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit. When performing the ending effect that is a part of the above-described jackpot effect, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the contents of the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the state of the after-hit game state flag 223c described later, In the ending effect, it is determined whether to perform “determined effect display” or “normal display”.

  The reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the control device 110. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and cannot obtain the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of held balls is managed by the held ball number counter 223b. Yes.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the number of held balls command indicating the value of the added number of held balls counter 203c. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the held ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and holds the number of held balls. The data is stored in the counter 223b (see S1208 in FIG. 31).

Further, in the main control device 110, when a new variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and further, the variation display to be started on the third symbol display device 81 is started. The variation pattern command indicating the above mode is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Subtract 1 (see S1505 in FIG. 38)
In this manner, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the held ball number counter 223b in accordance with the held ball number command or the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the number of held balls of the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203c.

  Further, the value of the held ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the held ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223b and displays the value of the stored ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the control device 114, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it displays a hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the held ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the held ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The jackpot after-game status flag 223c is the jackpot after the jackpot game state flag 203d of the main control device 110, when the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot that is in a special gaming state, and when the jackpot is finished, the game of the pachinko machine 10 It is a flag indicating whether the state becomes a low probability state or a high probability state. When the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state when the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c is on, the jackpot ends In this case, it is shown that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state.

  The jackpot after-game state flag 223c is set to OFF as an initial value by setting an initial value of the RAM 223 after power-on (see S1010 in FIG. 28). Further, the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is set when a fanfare command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1214 in FIG. 31). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and when the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the fanfare is reached. A command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In that case, the main controller 110 generates a fanfare command including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, and transmits the generated command to the sound lamp controller 113. .

  When the fan lamp command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot from the fan ticket command. That is, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is extracted. If the extracted gaming state is a “low probability state”, the after jackpot gaming state flag 223c is set to OFF, and if it is “high probability state”, the after jackpot gaming state flag 223c is set to ON. Is done.

  The jackpot after-game state flag 223c is used by the MPU 221 when an ending effect determination process (S1221 in FIG. 31) described later is executed. Although details will be described later, when performing an ending effect that is a part of the aforementioned jackpot effect, based on the contents of the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a described above and the state of the after-hit game state flag 223c, In the ending effect, it is determined whether to perform “definite effect display” or “normal display”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the state of the big hit after game state flag 223c is set based on the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110, but instead of the fanfare command, the main control device 110 Based on the stop type command transmitted from, the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c may be set. That is, in the main control device 110, when the big hit lottery is performed, the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined, the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern, and the determined stop type Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the stop type corresponding to the lottery result is determined, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Shows whether it is a big hit. Therefore, when receiving the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 can set the state of the jackpot after game state flag 223c based on what the stop type indicated by the stop type command is.

  Specifically, if the stop type indicated by the stop type command is a probable big jackpot, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot can be determined as a high probability state, so the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is turned on. Set to. On the other hand, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a normal jackpot, it can be determined that the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot becomes a low probability state, so the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is set off. To do. When the state of the after-hit game state flag 223c is set by the stop type command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the end of the current jackpot. good.

  In addition to the fanfare command, a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is newly provided, and the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Make up. Then, based on a new command transmitted from the main control device 110, the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 223c may be set. The method for setting the after-hit gaming state flag 223c may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the fanfare command described above, and is therefore omitted. If a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot.

  In this embodiment, when the fanfare command is received, the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is set. However, the state of the flag 223c will be described later after the fanfare command is received. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be set before the ending effect determination process (refer FIG. 33) is started. Even when it is configured to set the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 223c when the stop type command is received, the state of the flag 223c is determined by the ending effect determination process described later after receiving the stop type command. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may set before it is started. Even when a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, and the new command is received, the state of the big hit game state flag 223c is set. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may set, after receiving a new command, but before the ending effect determination process mentioned later is started.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1202 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1502 in FIG. 38). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1205 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1508 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot) and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h. Or whether to set the stop type as a chance.

  More specifically, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “big hit”, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1512 in FIG. 38). Also, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out” and the continuous notice count counter 223h is less than 2, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38). reference). On the other hand, when the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is “out” and the continuous notice count counter 223h is 2 or more, the chance item is set as the stop type instead of the extracted stop type. It is set (see S1513 in FIG. 38).

  The ending mode counter 223f is a counter used for determining the display mode in the ending effect, and is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed, for example, by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 3, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 3).

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit and determines the display mode in the ending effect, the value of the ending mode counter 223f and the ending mode selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 222 are By comparison, it is determined whether the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value (for example, 3) determined in advance in the ending mode selection table.

  Although details will be described later, in the audio lamp control device 113, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit and immediately before starting the above-mentioned ending effect, the contents of the holding area in the above-described prefetch information storage area 223a and the above-mentioned Whether to acquire the value of the ending state counter 223f is determined based on the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 223c. Here, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is not acquired, the display mode is determined so as to perform “normal display” in the ending effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is a value determined in advance in the ending mode selection table (for example, 3), the “definite effect display” is displayed. As shown, the display mode of the ending effect is set (see S1414 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, if the value of the ending mode counter 223f is other than a predetermined value (for example, 3) in the ending mode selection table, the display mode of the ending effect is set so that “normal display” is performed. (See S1415 in FIG. 33). That is, when the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired, the display mode is determined so that the “definite effect display” is performed with a probability of 1/3, and the “normal display” with the remaining 2/3 probability. The display mode is determined so as to be performed.

  When the display mode of the ending effect is set, a display ending command indicating the display mode of the ending effect (“normal display” or “definite effect display”) is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. . When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 performs display control so that the ending effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode indicated by the received display ending command.

  The continuous notice lottery counter 223g is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 29) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous notice lottery counter 223g is updated by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127, for example, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the prediction result of this prefetch, the jackpot jackpot type that is held, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g, The start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is compared with a continuous notice determination table 222a (see FIG. 11) described below, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is within a range predetermined in the continuous notice determination table 222a. Is determined. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1315 and S1316 in FIG. 32).

  The continuous notice determination table 222a satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)) when a prefetch command is received from the main controller 110. If so, it is a table for setting the “continuous notice determination probability”. Here, the continuous notice determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 11, the continuous notice determination table 222a has two tables: a continuous notice determination table 222a1 for a big hit and a continuous notice determination table 222a2 for a loss. When the prediction result of the big hit lottery extracted from the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is “big hit”, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the big hit time, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery Is “out”, the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of removal is selected. Thereby, the continuous notice determination probability can be changed according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (“big hit” or “out”).

  Each of the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of a loss is each value “1” that can be taken by the held ball number counter 223b (the number N of fluctuation display hold) in the sound lamp control device 113. To “4”, the range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g for determining the start of the continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) is defined respectively.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the consecutive notice determination table 222a1 at the time of the big hit defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the reserved ball number counter 223b, “0-15” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “2” of 223b, and “0-39” is designated as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the reserved ball number counter 223b. It is defined and “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “4” of the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Further, the consecutive notice determination table 222a2 at the time of detachment defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and sets the value “2” of the reserved ball number counter 223b. Correspondingly, “0-9” is defined as the continuous notice determination range, and “0-25” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the retained ball number counter 223b. In association with the value “4” of the counter 223b, “0 to 39” is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 32)). If so, one of the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing is selected as a table for setting the continuous notice determination probability. Then, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the held ball number counter 223b at that time is specified from the selected continuous notice determination table, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g at that time becomes the continuous notice determination range. If included, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Now, in both of the example of FIG. 11, the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of release are defined such that the continuous notice determination range becomes wider as the value of the held ball number counter 223b increases. However, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it is easy to make a decision to perform the continuous notice effect, and the probability of continuous notice determination increases, so that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit and the continuous notice determination at the time of losing Both tables 222a2 mean that the greater the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b (the number N of the variable display hold) is, the higher the continuous notice determination probability is. Here, since the continuous notice effect is performed over all the fluctuating effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined, the higher the number of hold times, the higher the continuous notice determination probability becomes. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of suspensions of variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of suspensions is small, it can be suppressed so that continuous notice effects are not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  In addition, when comparing the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of jackpot and the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing in the example of FIG. 11, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the same held ball number counter 223b It is defined that the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit is the same or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing. That is, the probability of continuous notice determination when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “big hit” is the same as or more than the probability of decision of continuous notice when the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out” Is set to be higher. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state is likely to become a “hit” after the end of the continuous notice effect. It is possible to give a high sense of expectation to the player. Also, normally, the probability that the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of the lottery performed when winning the ball at the first entrance 64) is “big hit” is more than the probability of “losing”. Is set to a small value, so if the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “out”, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. The continuous notice effect can be easily performed.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery extracted from the look-ahead command received from the main control device 110 is not only when the jackpot lottery is predicted, but the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out”, and Even when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “out-of-front / reach reach”, the permission determination for the continuous notice effect is performed. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “out-of-front / reach reach” or the like. Can be done. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, even if the discontinuation continues as a result of the lottery, since the continuous notice effect is performed, it is possible to give the player a high expectation and prevent the player from being bored. be able to.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The continuous notice counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. The initial value of the continuous notice counter 223h is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the prefetch command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the reserved ball number counter 223b at that time is determined. Is stored (see S1317 in FIG. 32).

  The value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. If the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is a value of 2 or more, instead of the extracted stop type, the chance eye is set as the stop type (see S1513 in FIG. 38), and the set stop type is The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. Further, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 38).

  In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. When the chance type is set as the stop type, for example, on the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the main symbol combinations are “3”, “4”, and “1” in order from the left symbol row Z1. A symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 38), and the set stop is set. The type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Note that the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is kept at 0 (see S1515: No in FIG. 38). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is 1, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, and therefore, as the stop type As in the case where the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 without setting the chance, the extracted stop type is set as it is (S1512 in FIG. 32), and the set stop type is the display stop type. The display control device 114 is notified by the command. However, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is decremented by 1 (see S1516 in FIG. 32).

  Thus, while the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more, every time a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, a chance item is set as the stop type, and the set value is set. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect being performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol that becomes a chance is displayed.

  Here, the continuous notice number counter 223h stores the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b at the time when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, and each time a stop type command is received thereafter. If the value is 1 or more, the value is decreased by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop symbols that become chance chances are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110. That is, stop symbols that become chances are continuously displayed.

  Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chances as the stop pattern of the changing effect most watched during the game. In addition, even if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the player has a sense of expectation that a jackpot will be obtained after the end of the continuous notice effect by displaying the chance chance. Can be made.

  Further, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is referred to in order to determine whether or not execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (FIG. 32). S1305). If the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 (see S1306: Yes in FIG. 32), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set for all the variable effects held in the main control device 110. It determines with satisfying (condition 1) among the predetermined conditions mentioned above, and determines the start of a continuous notice effect with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing related to the continuous notice effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, and wins the first entrance 64. The lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched based on data (each counter C1 to C3, CS1 values, winning game state flag) acquired according to (start winning prize), and various information ( The prediction result of the big hit lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type) and the preconditions for the prefetching are included in the prefetching command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the prefetch command, stores them as prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223a, and decides to start the continuous notice effect according to the contents of the prefetch information storage area 223a. to decide. Then, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop type is set for each variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  The post-notice jackpot flag 223i is stored after the continuous notice effect set for a plurality of fluctuating effects is executed by storing the value of the held ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice number counter 223h. It is a flag which shows the game state after a change production. When the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is ON, it indicates that the gaming state after the fluctuating effect after execution of all the continuous notice effects is in the “hit” state. When the value is OFF, it indicates that the gaming state after the fluctuating effect after the execution of all the continuous notice effects is performed is the “out” state. The variation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is a change effect performed when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1.

  The post-notice jackpot flag 223i indicates that the jackpot lottery prediction result extracted from the pre-read command when the sound lamp controller 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect based on the pre-read command received from the main controller 110. If the jackpot is set to ON (see S1319 in FIG. 32), if the jackpot lottery prediction result extracted from the prefetch command is “out”, the switch is set to OFF (see S1320 in FIG. 32). The value is held until the next start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Further, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is being executed when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the sound lamp control apparatus 113 refers to the post-notice big hit flag 223i (see S1307 in FIG. 32). If the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on (see S1307 in FIG. 32: Yes), the game after the fluctuating effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the fluctuating effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is a “hit” state, 2 between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. It is determined whether or not the above-described fluctuating effect (holding ball) exists (that is, whether or not the difference between the value of the holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 3 or more), It is determined whether or not (Condition 2) is satisfied (see S1309 in FIG. 32).

  On the other hand, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is OFF (see S1307 in FIG. 32: No), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is the “out” state, it is further determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery newly notified by the pre-read command is “big jackpot”, and among the predetermined conditions described above (condition 3) Is determined (see S1311 in FIG. 32).

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination process The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins (starts winning) at the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the timing of the new starting win. And a gaming state flag 203a (that is, a winning gaming state flag) are acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110, the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern prior to the big hit lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110. When the prefetching is completed, the prediction preconditions together with various information obtained by the prefetching (prediction result of jackpot lottery and prediction result of variation pattern type) are transferred from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device by the prefetch command described above. 113 is notified. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, it extracts various information from the command as prefetch information and stores it in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The pre-read information stored here is used in the audio lamp control device 113 when the display mode of the ending effect is set or when it is determined whether to start the continuous notice effect.

  However, as will be described later, in both the pachinko machine 10 and the conventional pachinko machine, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by prefetching and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result are the main controller 110. May be different. This is when there is a pending start prize when the ball newly wins at the first entrance 64 (start prize) and the jackpot lottery associated with the pending start prize has been made. The lottery result is a big hit, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes before and after the big win.

  That is, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that the winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64 is held up to a plurality of times (up to four times in the present pachinko machine 10). In the main control device 110, if there is a pending start prize when the ball newly wins the first entrance 64 (start prize), the lottery of the jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize After the results are prefetched, the jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed after all the jackpot lotteries associated with the respective start prizes that have been held at the time of the new start prize are completed.

  Then, the jackpot lottery associated with each start prize that was on hold at the time of the new start prize is executed in the main controller 110. If any lottery result becomes a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 The game state is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start prize and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting prize will not match. End up.

  In the conventional main controller 110 of the pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning, and in the jackpot lottery The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery.

  Therefore, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start prize does not match the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting prize, it was used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery The main controller 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, since the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are different, there is a high possibility that the respective comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, The actual lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main controller 110.

  In addition, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start prize matches the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize, it is used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching match. Therefore, since the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is also the same for the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison, the comparison results match, corresponding to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result. The actual jackpot lottery result matches with the main controller 110.

  Further, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is pre-read in the main controller 110, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result is determined by which table 202a1, It was not configured to be able to determine whether it was obtained using 202a2. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 also determines which table 202a1, 202a2 the prediction result is obtained from. could not.

  However, even in a conventional pachinko machine, both the pre-fetching of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The main control device 110 is performed in the same gaming state. Accordingly, the main controller 110 always has the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch. Match. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control device 110. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The jackpot lottery prediction results were treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, if the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from when the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery to when the actual big win lottery corresponding to the pre-fetch is performed. It becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Thus, the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch. It becomes unknown whether to do. Accordingly, in this case, the jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main controller 110. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot lottery Was treated as untrustworthy.

  Then, in the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, by refraining from using the prediction result, a process unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery (for example, (For example, a continuous notice effect and an ending effect) were suppressed. Therefore, the prefetching of the lottery effect lottery result and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery are useless.

  On the other hand, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to use all the prediction results of the jackpot lottery obtained so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery obtained in the main controller 110 are not wasted, As described below with reference to each of FIGS. 53 to 55, there arises a problem that processing unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result is executed. In any case, as described above, when the ball newly wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, there is a start start pending, and the start that has been put on hold. This is due to the fact that the lottery result is a big win when the big win lottery accompanying the winning is made, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes before and after the big win.

  Here, with reference to each figure of FIGS. 53-55, the problem which arises when the display mode of the ending effect which is a part of the jackpot effect is determined using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery will be described. It should be noted that the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery immediately before the ending effect is started. Also, to make the explanation easier to understand, here, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is assumed that “determined effect display” is always selected in the ending effect, and the prediction precondition is the same as the conventional pachinko machine Further, it is assumed that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning is selected.

  Each of FIGS. 53 to 55 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery during the jackpot effect. First, an example of the problem will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 53 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. This shows a state in which start prizes A and B are generated during the execution of. In the jackpot lottery associated with the starting prize A, the lottery result will be disregarded regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine (low probability state, high probability state). In the jackpot lottery associated with the starting prize B, the pachinko machine If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result is a probable big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result is lost.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), when a start prize A is generated during execution of the variation effect, the lottery result is pre-read A based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. When the start winning A is generated, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a high probability state, so the high probability state is selected as a precondition for predicting the look-ahead A. As a result, when the prefetch A of the lottery result is performed for the start winning A, the prediction result of the prefetch A is lost. Further, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine is also a high probability state when the start winning B is generated, the high probability state is selected as a precondition for the prefetch B. As a result, when the pre-reading B of the lottery result is performed for the start winning B, the prediction result of the pre-reading B becomes a probable big hit.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the jackpot effect is started, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition, since this jackpot is usually a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine continues to be in a low probability state even after the jackpot effect is finished. When the jackpot presentation ends, first, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize A is performed, and a variable presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed. Subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the start prize B is performed, Fluctuation effects accompanying the lottery are executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize A is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a low probability state.

  Therefore, although a high-probability state is selected as a precondition for prediction and pre-reading A is performed, since the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize A is performed in a low-probability state, the prediction result of pre-reading A and the actual lottery result are The possibility of different is high. However, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), for the start winning A, the prediction result of the pre-reading A and the actual lottery result are both out of coincidence, so that the lottery results are the same.

  In addition, as in the case of the start winning A, the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning B is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a low probability state. Therefore, in this case as well, although the high probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the prefetch B is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prize B is performed in the low probability state, so the prediction result of the prefetch B and the actual There is a high possibility that the lottery result will be different. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the prediction result of the prefetch B is a probable big hit, but the actual lottery result is lost and the lottery results are inconsistent.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is simply configured to determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching B is a big hit. Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result, and as a result, “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “determined effect display”, the player is notified that the lottery result will be a big win in the jackpot lottery that is being held when the jackpot ends, and therefore when the “definite effect display” is performed. The player has a sense of expectation that the lottery result will be a big hit when any of the held big hit lotteries is made after the jackpot ends.

  However, after that, even if the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends and the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prizes A and B held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, Actually it is not a big hit. Therefore, even though the “decision effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, there is a problem that the lottery result is not a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that processing (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed with a useless expectation, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  Next, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 54 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a low probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a probability variation jackpot, and a variation effect corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed. The start winning prizes C and D are generated during the execution of In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize C, the lottery result will be disregarded regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine (low probability state, high probability state). If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result is lost, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when a start prize C is generated during the execution of the variation effect, the lottery result is pre-read C based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. When the start prize C is generated, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, so the low probability state is selected as a precondition for predicting the look-ahead C. As a result, when the prefetch C of the lottery result is performed for the start winning prize C, the prediction result of the prefetch C is lost. In addition, when the start winning D is generated, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is the low probability state as in the case of the start winning C. Therefore, the low probability state is selected as a precondition for the prefetch D. As a result, when the pre-read D of the lottery result is performed for the start winning prize D, the prediction result of the pre-read D is usually a big hit.

  After that, even if the jackpot effect is started, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is originally in a low probability state, so it continues to be in a low probability state. Note that this jackpot is a promising jackpot, and when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. When the jackpot presentation ends, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize C is first performed, the fluctuating presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and then the jackpot lottery with the start prize D is performed. Fluctuation effects accompanying the lottery are executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54A, the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize C is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the prefetch C is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prize C is performed in the high probability state, so the prediction result of the prefetch C and the actual lottery result are The possibility of different is high. However, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), with respect to the start winning prize C, the prediction result of the pre-read C and the actual lottery result coincide with each other, so that the lottery results coincide with each other.

  The jackpot lottery accompanying the start prize D is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a high probability state as in the case of the start prize D. Therefore, in this case as well, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the prefetch D is performed, the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize D is performed in the high probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result will be different. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the prediction result of the prefetch D is usually a big hit, but the actual lottery result is lost, and the lottery results are inconsistent.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is simply configured to determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching D is a big hit. Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result, and as a result, “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “determined effect display”, the player is notified that the lottery result will be a big win in the jackpot lottery that is being held when the jackpot ends, and therefore when the “definite effect display” is performed. The player has a sense of expectation that the lottery result will be a big hit when any of the held big hit lotteries is made after the jackpot ends.

  However, after that, even if the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends and the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prizes C and D held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, Actually it is not a big hit. Therefore, even though the “decision effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, there is a problem that the lottery result is not a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that processing (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed with a useless expectation, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  Next, the problem will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the start winning prizes E and F are generated when the pachinko machine is a jackpot and the jackpot effect accompanying the jackpot is being executed, and at the timing when the jackpot ends. This shows a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine changes from a low probability state to a high probability state. As described above, while the pachinko machine is in a big hit, the lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start prize E, the lottery result will be disregarded regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine (low probability state, high probability state). If the gaming state is a high probability state, the lottery result will be lost, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, the lottery result will be a probable big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when a start winning E occurs during execution of the jackpot effect, the lottery result prefetching E is performed based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine. When the start winning E is generated, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is a low probability state, so the low probability state is selected as a precondition for predicting the look-ahead E. As a result, when the pre-reading E for the start winning prize E is performed, the prediction result of the pre-reading E is lost. In addition, when the start winning F is generated, similarly to the start winning E, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a low probability state, so the low probability state is selected as a precondition for predicting the look-ahead F. As a result, when the prefetch F of the lottery result is performed for the start winning F, the prediction result of the prefetch F becomes a probable big hit.

  Thereafter, when the jackpot effect ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. First, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize E is performed, and a variation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed. Subsequently, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize F is performed, and the variation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is performed. Executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize E is performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a high probability state.

  Therefore, although the low probability state is selected as the prediction precondition and the look-ahead E is performed, since the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prize E is performed in the high probability state, the prediction result of the look-ahead E and the actual lottery result are The possibility of different is high. However, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), for the start winning prize E, the prediction result of the pre-reading E and the actual lottery result are both out of coincidence, so that the lottery results coincide with each other.

  The jackpot lottery accompanying the start prize F is also performed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is in a high probability state, as in the case of the start prize F. Therefore, in this case as well, although the low probability state is selected as the precondition for prediction and the look-ahead F is performed, the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning F is performed in the high probability state. There is a high possibility that the lottery result will be different. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the prediction result of the prefetch F is a probable big hit, but the actual lottery result is lost, and the lottery results are inconsistent.

  In such a case, if the pachinko machine is simply configured to determine the display mode of the ending effect based on the prediction result of the prefetching, the prediction result of the prefetching F is a big hit. Among them, it is determined that there is a lottery result, and as a result, “definite effect display” is performed in the ending effect. As described above, in the “determined effect display”, the player is notified that the lottery result will be a big win in the jackpot lottery that is being held when the jackpot ends, and therefore when the “definite effect display” is performed. The player has a sense of expectation that the lottery result will be a big hit when any of the held big hit lotteries is made after the jackpot ends.

  However, after that, even if the jackpot effect (ending effect) ends and the actual jackpot lottery with the start winning prizes E and F held at the end of the jackpot effect is performed, the lottery result will be out, Actually it is not a big hit. Therefore, even though the “decision effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, there is a problem that the lottery result is not a big hit. That is, there arises a problem that processing (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result is executed. Therefore, the player is disappointed with a useless expectation, and the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to use all the prediction results of the jackpot lottery so that the prediction results of the jackpot lottery are not wasted, There arises a problem that a process (for example, production) unrelated to the lottery result is executed. As described above, in any case, when a ball is newly won (start prize) at the first entrance 64, there is a pending start prize, and the jackpot associated with the pending start prize is The lottery result is a jackpot in the lottery, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes before and after the jackpot.

  That is, as described above, in the main controller 110, if there is a pending start prize, if there is a pending start prize, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize is pre-read, After all the jackpot lotteries associated with each start prize that have been on hold at the time of the new start prize are completed, the jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed. Therefore, the jackpot lottery associated with each start prize that was on hold at the time of the new start prize is executed in the main controller 110, and if any lottery result becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot Accordingly, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set. As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start prize and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the big hit lottery accompanying the new starting prize will not match. End up.

  As described above, in the conventional main controller 110 of the pachinko machine, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning. Furthermore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the game state of the pachinko machine at the time of the new start prize and the game state of the pachinko machine at the jackpot lottery accompanying the new start prize do not match, it was used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery The main controller 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching.

  Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for the comparison are different. In some cases, the main controller 110 differs from the actual lottery result of the lottery corresponding to the prediction result. Then, when such a prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 and used in the sound lamp control device 113, a process (for example, production or the like) irrelevant to the actual lottery lottery result ) Is executed.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are different in the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113 The lottery prediction results were treated as unreliable and refrained from using the prediction results. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  In order to solve this, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that more reliable prediction results can be handled in the sound lamp control device 113. That is, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively. It may be possible to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to, and notify the sound lamp control device 113.

  If comprised in this way, when using the prediction result of a jackpot lottery in the audio lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can always be treated as reliable. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Further, by using this reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress problems such as execution of a process (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result.

  However, as described above, when the main controller 110 prefetches the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are stored as in the case of the big hit lottery. The process of comparing the hit values that have been made one by one is performed. Therefore, each time a new start prize is generated, a process of comparing the values of the first random number counter C1 and the winning values stored in the two big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one, Must be repeated up to 33 times. Therefore, every time a new start prize is generated, the comparison process may take a long time, and time may be wasted.

  The main control device 110 uses two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to obtain prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2, but the sound lamp control device 113 uses the prediction results of the jackpot lottery. In some cases, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, a part of the comparison process that may be performed in the main controller 110 may be wasted. Further, every time a new start prize is received, the main control device 110 obtains two prediction results, but the sound lamp control device 113 uses only one of the prediction results, so that a useless prediction result always occurs. Therefore, the number of prediction results that are wasted increases compared to the case of a conventional pachinko machine.

  Further, since the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, a larger storage area is required than in the prior art. In addition, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, so that data to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 increases. For this reason, there is a possibility that data to be preferentially transmitted cannot be transmitted, and the control burden on the main controller 110 also increases. In addition, since the data received by the voice lamp control device 113 increases, the control burden increases.

  As described above, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to and notify the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 is trusted. Although more prediction results can be handled, other problems such as increased processing time and control burden arise.

  Apart from this, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that more reliable prediction results can be handled in the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and the lottery result is a big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is determined according to the big hit type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the time of the end of the big hit to pre-read each pending start prize. It is conceivable to redo each and notify each of the prediction results obtained by the redo from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  If comprised in this way, in the main controller 110, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 will change from when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. As a result, even if the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is unreliable in the sound lamp control device 113, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 instead. The result can be used as trustworthy.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again is obtained in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot ends in the main controller 110. is there. Therefore, since the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 predicts the jackpot lottery prediction result. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Further, by using this reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress problems such as execution of a process (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery wins, the main control device 110 re-reads the pre-reading for each pending start prize, and the prediction results obtained by the redemption are the main results. The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 again. Therefore, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery subject to redoing and the prediction result are wasted.

  Therefore, useless processing is performed in the main controller 110, and a control burden is imposed. Also, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 also performs useless processing, which is a control burden. It takes. In addition, data transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 increases. For this reason, there is a possibility that data to be preferentially transmitted cannot be transmitted, and the control burden on the main controller 110 also increases. In addition, since the data received by the voice lamp control device 113 increases, the control burden increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the current big hit to use each pending start prize. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to re-read each of the pre-reads and notify the sound lamp control device 113 of each prediction result obtained by the redo, the sound lamp control device 113 is trusted. Although more prediction results can be handled, other problems such as wasteful processing and increased control burden arise.

  Apart from this, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that more reliable prediction results can be handled in the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and the lottery result is a big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is determined according to the big hit type. Therefore, the main controller 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 wins the jackpot random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot in the main controller 110. It is conceivable to use 202a1 and 202a2 to pre-read each pending start prize and to notify each prediction result from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113.

  If comprised in this way, only when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes the big hit in the main controller 110 and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change, it is possible to pre-read each pending start prize. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by this look-ahead is obtained in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot ends in the main controller 110. . Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Can be treated as Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Further, by using this reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress problems such as execution of a process (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result.

  However, only when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes a big win in the main controller 110, the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched, and the number (frequency) of prefetching is reduced. Then, since the number of prediction results of the jackpot lottery notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is also reduced, the frequency of using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is decreased in the sound lamp control device 113, and the above-described continuous Opportunities to perform the notice effect will decrease. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  As explained above, the main controller 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 wins the jackpot, the main controller 110 corresponds to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to pre-read each pending start prize using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be notified and notify the prediction results from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. Another problem is that although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the frequency of using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is reduced, and the interest of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. Occurs.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the prediction precondition is stored in the sound lamp control device 113, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the look-ahead are supported. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery are configured to be discriminated. As a result, more reliable prediction results can be handled without causing problems such as unnecessary processing and increased control burden, and reducing the frequency of using prediction results of jackpot lottery.

  That is, as described above, since the conventional pachinko machine does not store the prediction precondition, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes after the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery. It becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. It was not possible to determine whether they matched. Accordingly, in this case, the jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main controller 110. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot lottery Was treated as untrustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c, so that the jackpot random number table 202a1, used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery Whether the main control device 110 matches 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching can always be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead, Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not they match in the main controller 110, this embodiment can make this determination.

  As a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  More specifically, when the ball newly wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, the data related to the new start winning is acquired in the main controller 110, and the data is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Are newly stored in the reserved area, and the start winning is pre-read. Then, a prefetch command including various pieces of information (prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) obtained by the prefetching and a precondition for the prefetching prediction is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The

  When the pre-read command is received in the sound lamp control device 113, various information (prediction result of big hit lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) and pre-prediction prediction preconditions are extracted as pre-read information from the pre-read command. The prefetch information is newly stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. As a result, when the pre-read information is used in the sound lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is obtained by pre-reading based on which gaming state by referring to the prediction precondition in the pre-read information. You can determine whether it is a thing. In other words, the main controller 110 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the big hit lottery.

  Further, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the start of the fanfare effect and the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit are made by the fanfare command from the main controller 110 by the sound lamp. The control device 113 is notified. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change, the newly set gaming state can be notified again to the sound lamp control device 113 by the fanfare command.

  Then, when the fanfare command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state from the fanfare command, and sets the state of the big hit after gaming state flag 223c according to the gaming state. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is set when the big hit ends in the main control device 110, based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 can discriminate the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current jackpot is completed.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction preconditions and the post-hit gaming state flag 223c. Therefore, when the sound lamp control device 113 uses the prefetch information, It can be determined whether or not the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used match the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the prefetching in the main controller 110. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead, Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not they match in the main controller 110, this embodiment can make this determination.

  As a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even in the case of a prediction result that is treated as unreliable in a conventional pachinko machine, the present pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of a jackpot lottery can be suitably handled. . Therefore, the frequency which can utilize the prediction result of jackpot lottery becomes higher than the conventional pachinko machine, and the opportunity which can improve the interest property of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Note that in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery results of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number table 202a1 scheduled to be used for the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. , 202a2 are matched with each other in the main controller 110, and as a result, if the tables 202a1, 202a2 do not match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result Since there is a high possibility of different, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is treated as untrustworthy. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately, and problems such as execution of processing (for example, effects) unrelated to the actual jackpot lottery result can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the main controller 110 prefetches the lottery result of the big hit lottery, it is not necessary to obtain the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2 together. In addition, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit in the main control device 110, it is not necessary to redo the pre-reading for each pending start prize. Therefore, the prediction result of the big win lottery can be suitably handled without causing problems such as an increase in processing time and a control burden, and problems such as an unnecessary process and an increase in control burden.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the pre-read command, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like, in addition to the information indicating the pre-prediction prediction precondition, the main controller 110 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, but the information indicating the preconditions for the prefetching prediction is only 1 bit. In addition, the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, and is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. At the end of the jackpot, The information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only 1 bit. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, the amount of data processed in the MPUs 201 and 221 is almost the same as that in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the control burden on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is small, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be suitably handled.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol structure displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model with different lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Since there is a model, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 39) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1603 and S1604 in FIG. 39).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 13 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 13B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out”, the image shown in FIG. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 14B shows the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 15 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 15C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 15C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 15A is displayed again, and the back images shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 14A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only image data corresponding to the partial area of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Further, the back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 15A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 15A and 15B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 15A to 15B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 can be obtained when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 15A to 15B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 15 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 15 (b) to 15 (c) and FIGS. 15 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are used for normal use while the images of FIGS. 15A to 15B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images shown in FIGS. The images shown in FIGS. 15B to 15C and FIGS. 15C to 15A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the elapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the rear image thus made. be able to.

  Note that on the back surface B and back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 12) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a fanfare data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and follow the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the discontinuation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is 15R probability variation big hit 2R If the probability change jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the big hit and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect will congratulate the jackpot. However, this is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the jackpot lottery that is on hold along with the end of the jackpot (displays the final effect), or simply tells the player that the jackpot will end This is an effect for notifying (performing normal display).

  By displaying the finalized effect in the ending effect, the player can win the lottery result when any of the lottery lotteries held at the end of the jackpot is made after the jackpot is finished. Can be recognized. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, the player can be relieved every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes a jackpot after the jackpot ends. Even if the lottery result is out of the game, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 16). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 17 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to be transferred corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 17).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 17, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 18) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 17, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1605 in FIG. 39). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3205 in FIG. 50B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1901 in FIG. 41B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 41B) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) S1909) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3101 in FIG. 50A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 18), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 41B). ) (See S1903)), pointer update processing (see S2805 in FIG. 47) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 18), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 18, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 41B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S2807 in FIG. 47). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3317 in FIG. 51). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3318 in FIG. 51). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3402 in FIG. 52).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 41B) is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 52).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 to 27. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds, for example. When the MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, when an external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of a main process, which will be described later, is executed, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values. (In this embodiment, when reaching 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively), each is cleared to 0. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one turn), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one turn), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting the variation pattern type of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the first incoming ball A start winning process associated with winning in the mouth 64 is executed (S105). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether or not there is a start (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and if there is a start winning, the amount of the winning is excluded. If the number of reserved balls is less than the maximum value (4 balls), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are acquired at the timing of winning the start and are stored in the reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Stored. Also, a pre-read execution flag is used to pre-read the lottery result of the big win lottery based on the data newly stored in the holding ball storage area 203b (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, and the winning game state flag). 203f is set to ON.

  When the start winning process is completed, it is then determined whether the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106). If the prefetch execution flag 203f is on (S106: Yes), the prefetch process is executed ( S107) Prefetching the lottery result of the big hit lottery for the data (each counter C1-C3, CS1 value, winning game state flag) newly stored in the holding ball storage area 203b by the start winning process described above . Details of the prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the prefetch execution flag 203f is off (S106: No), the process of S107 is skipped. Next, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, when an external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26), which will be described later, is executed, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111.

  Next, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a start (start winning) at the first entrance 64. If there is a start winning, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the game state flag 203a, Is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is pre-read for the held data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1, winning game state flag). In order to do this, a process of setting the prefetch execution flag 203f to ON is executed.

  In this start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203c (the variation effect held in the main controller 110 is held) Ball number N) is acquired (S202), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 4 or more. If there is (S203: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the value (N) of the retained ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203c. 1 is added to (the number of reserved balls N) (S204), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value (the number of reserved balls N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The ball number command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when the external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process, which will be described later, is executed, the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation-type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer, and are held in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the retained ball number counter 203c among the first to fourth areas. And it holds (stores) each in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the held ball number counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the storage areas of the hold first area, respectively. . Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is “2”, each of the storage areas of the reserved second area is stored. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is “3”, the reserved third area If the value of the retained ball number counter 203c after addition is “4” in each storage area, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retained in each storage area of the retained fourth area.

  Next, the game state flag 203a is used as a winning game state flag and corresponds to the value (N) indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203c among the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Is stored in the winning game state flag storage area 203b5 (S207). That is, in the process of S207, the winning game state flag is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area in which the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is stored in the process of S206.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the execution timing of the variation effect is reached, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203b and the winning game state flag are Shift to the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, the big hit lottery, the determination of the variation pattern type, and the like are executed. As described above, the data (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are used for jackpot lottery performed at the start timing of the variation effect, determination of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  Next, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON (S208). Here, when the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to ON, a prefetch process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is executed. As a result, data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the processes of S206 and S207 (each For each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a winning game state flag), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched. That is, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) are also used for prefetching the lottery result of the big win lottery.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203e is on (S209). As described above, if the jackpot flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if the jackpot flag 203e is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (high probability state or jackpot) Is in a low-probability state. When the jackpot flag 203e is on (S209: Yes), it means that the current start winning is a jackpot starting prize, so the jackpot medium prize flag 203g is set on (S210), This start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 203e is off (S209: No), it means that the current start win is a win in the normal state, and therefore the jackpot / medium prize flag 203g is set to off (S211). ), The start winning process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  When the MPU 201 prefetches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with respect to the data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1 and the winning game state flag) stored in the holding ball storage area 203b by the processes of S206 and S207, Refer to the state of the jackpot medium winning flag 203g. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. That is, the gaming state flag 203a is off during the big hit. Therefore, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during the jackpot (start winning), when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are acquired at the start winning timing, The state of the gaming state flag 203a is always off (low probability state), and as a result, the winning gaming state flag is also always off.

  For this reason, if the data subject to prefetching was acquired with a big winning start prize, and predicting the lottery result according to the winning game state flag in the data, the precondition for prefetching Is always in a low probability state, the prediction result is less likely to match the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is poor. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, if the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start winning with a big hit, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit The lottery result is predicted according to the state. In the processing of S209 to S211, it is determined whether or not the data acquired with the start winning is acquired with the start winning with the big win when the pre-reading process (see FIG. 23) described later is executed. The state of the big hit / win prize flag 203e is set so that it can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the fluctuation process (S104) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S104). The variation process (S104) controls variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203e is on and the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. The jackpot flag 203e is set to ON at the timing when the start of the jackpot is set by the processing of S315 described later, and then the timing when the jackpot ends by the processing of S914 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 27) described later. Set to off.

  As a result of the determination in S301, if the big hit flag 203e is on and if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the big hit flag 203e is off and not big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the first symbol display is performed. If the display mode of the device 37 is not changing (S302: No), it is next determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the change display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the suspension of the change (S303: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203c (the number of retained balls N of the variable display held in the main controller 110) Is acquired (S304), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the acquired reserved ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S305). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N) exceeds 0 (S305: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the changing effect. First, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c 1 is subtracted from (the number N of reserved balls) (S306). This is because one change effect on hold is started to be executed by a change start process (S308) described later, and as a result, the number of held balls is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S307). The data shift process performed in the process of S307 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the area having a smaller area number. Specifically, the first area for holding → the execution area, the second area for holding → the first area for holding, the third area for holding → the second area for holding, the fourth area for holding → the third area for holding, etc. Shift data.

  When the processing of S307 is completed, next, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 execute variation start processing for starting variation display (S308), and return to the timer interrupt processing. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S305, if it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of held balls N) is 0 (S305: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not a demonstration is in progress (S309). In the process of S309, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203c (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S309: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S310), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S309: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S310 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when an external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process to be described later is executed, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has passed (S311). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern type selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has elapsed. If not (S311: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S311: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The stop symbol (big hit type) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, a stop symbol (big jackpot type) that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will shift to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a maximum round number of 2 rounds) Stop symbol (big jackpot type) that becomes a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after jackpot) or a stop symbol (big jackpot type that hits a low probability state after a maximum round number of 15 rounds) ) Is determined.

  In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation big hit is reached, and the red LED is turned on when the 15R normal jackpot is reached. And turn on the blue LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the processing of S312 is completed, it is next determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is a big hit (S313). If the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation display is out (S313: No), the fluctuation process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is a big hit (S313: Yes), the start of the big win is set (S314). Here, when the jackpot start is set, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the process branches to S901: Yes (see FIG. 27), and the fanfare command Is set. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S314 is completed, next, the jackpot flag 203e is set to ON (S315), the gaming state flag 203a is set to OFF (low probability state) (S316), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the big win lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. Therefore, the gaming state flag 203a is off (low probability state) while the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit. If the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is a promising big hit, the game state flag 203a is set to ON when the big win ends, while the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is a normal big hit. If there is, even if the jackpot ends, the game state flag 203a remains off.

  In the variation process described above, the start of jackpot is set in the process of S314, and then the jackpot flag 203e is set to ON in the process of S315. As described above, when the jackpot start is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (see S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the process proceeds to S901: Yes (see FIG. 27). ) Branch. Therefore, in the big hit control process, when branching to S901: Yes, the big hit medium flag 203e may be set to ON. In other words, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON before the jackpot start, it may be executed in any process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the change start process (S308) which is one process of the change process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S308). In this variation start process (S308), a lottery (big hit lottery) of “big hit” or “out” is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. At the same time, the effect pattern (variation pattern type) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored. Obtain (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state flag 203a is on (high probability state) (S402). If the state of the game state flag 203a is on (S402: Yes), two types of jackpot random number tables prepared Among 202a, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is acquired (S403). On the other hand, if the state of the game state flag 203a is OFF (S402: No), the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 is acquired from the two types of big hit random number tables 202a (S404).

  Then, the jackpot random number table acquired in S403 or S404 is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in S401 (S405). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 as random values (winning values) that are jackpots when the probability is low. Further, in the high probability big hit random number table 202 a 2, 30 random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” are given as random numbers (hit values) that become big hits at the high probability. , 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. In the process of S405, the random number value (win value) stored in the acquired jackpot random number table is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401, and if they match, the jackpot It is determined that

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the comparison by the process of S405 is a big hit (S406). And the display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the jackpot type table mentioned above (S407).

  In the process of S407, in the jackpot type table, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, that is, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. It is determined whether 15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a maximum round number of 15 rounds jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a maximum round number of jackpots of two rounds. Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. The display mode at the time of big hit in the 3 symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 and the above-described variation pattern table for jackpot, the variation pattern type at the time of jackpot is determined (S408). In the processing of S408, various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, 2R variation A to C, the jackpot type determined in the processing of S407 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S401. The associated variation pattern type at the time of jackpot is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S408, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  When the processing of S408 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the processing of S407 is a probabilistic jackpot (S409). In the process of S409, when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (S409: Yes), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability state at the timing when the jackpot is started, and then the timing when the jackpot ends. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the big jackpot gaming state flag 203d indicating the gaming state after the big jackpot is ended is set to ON (S410), and the process proceeds to S414. On the other hand, in the process of S409, when the jackpot type is a normal jackpot (S409: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability state at the timing when the jackpot is started, and then the jackpot ends. Even so, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained in a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, the big jackpot gaming state flag 203d indicating the gaming state after the big jackpot ends is set to OFF (S411), and the process proceeds to S414.

  If it is determined in step S406 that it is not a big hit (S406: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S412). In the process of S412, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401. As the stop type to be displayed in, one of front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, and complete out is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of deviation is determined (S413), and the process proceeds to S414. In the process of S413, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display with the off symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state excluding the short-time state, the short-out, long-out, out-of-normal normal reach, out-of-bounds, etc. Out of the various types of super reach and out of special reach, the variation pattern type at the time of detachment associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 acquired by the processing of S401 is determined.

  Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of the probability change, the short-out, long-out, various out-of-normal normal reach, the out-of-reach super reach based on the above-described variation pattern table for out (probability change). From the various types of detachment special reach, the variation pattern type at the time of detachment associated with the stop type set by the processing of S412 and the variation type counter CS1 acquired by the processing of S401 is determined. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the processing of S414, based on the variation pattern type determined by the processing of S408 and S413, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S414). . Also, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S407 or S412 is set via the audio lamp control device 113 (S415), and the process returns to the variation processing. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and when a main process external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) described later is executed, The command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based on the command, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 203d (S410 and S411) is set in the variation start process. Reference is made when the process of S902 is executed and a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, it may be set at any timing as long as it is before the processing of S902 is executed.

  Next, the prefetching process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). In this pre-reading process, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag at the time of winning) associated with detection of the start winning is newly acquired in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20), and the pre-reading execution flag is acquired. This process is executed when 203f is set to ON, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read for the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the winning game state flag stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b Is read (S501). Note that the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is specified based on the held ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the reserved first area is specified as the data stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Similarly, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the reserved second area is stored. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b is 3, the data stored in the reserved third area is stored. When the value of the ball counter 203b is 4, the data stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the data stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the winning game state flag acquired in the process of S501 is ON (high probability state) (S502). In the process of S502, if the winning game state flag is on (S502: Yes), the pre-reading prediction precondition is set to a high probability state, that is, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. This is a case where prefetching is performed under conditions. Therefore, in this case, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is acquired from the two types of big hit random number tables 202a (S505), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when the winning game state flag is OFF (S502: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is ON (S503).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the big win lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. For this reason, when the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start win with the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data always indicates a low probability state. Therefore, if the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, the pre-reading prediction precondition is always in a low probability state, and the prediction result is unlikely to match the actual lottery result. Therefore, the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the start win during the big win, the game state at the end of the big win is pre-read as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of prediction of the lottery result is improved. That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, it is further determined what the jackpot type is, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot. At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the current jackpot type. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the game state at the end of the jackpot cannot be determined until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 is reached, but if the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is already determined. Therefore, the main control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot.

  And in this pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot ends, if there is a jackpot lottery pending in the main controller 110, the pending jackpot lottery is one by one in the gaming state set at the time of the jackpot end It is executed in the main controller 110 in order. Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot.

  Therefore, when prefetching about the start winning prize during the jackpot, the prediction prerequisite of the jackpot lottery is more likely to be the game condition at the end of the jackpot than the prediction prerequisite is always in a low probability state. Thus, the possibility that the main controller 110 matches the actual lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result can be improved. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be handled as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 can be increased, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used in this embodiment.

  Specifically, in the process of S503, if the big hit medium winning flag 203g is off and a winning is made during the normal state (S503: No), the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the processing of S503, if the big hit mid-winning flag 203g is on, and if the start win is made during the big win (S503: Yes), it is determined whether the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is on (high probability state). (S504). As described above, the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit, and the above-described variation start process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit Is determined, the state of the flag 203d is set. Therefore, the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is already set before the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit. Therefore, when there is a start win during the jackpot, it is possible to predict the prefetch for the start win based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot (the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 203d).

  In the processing of S504, if the after jackpot gaming state flag 203d is on (S504: Yes), the winning win is made during the jackpot, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot has a high probability. Since this is a state, the process proceeds to S505, the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S507. Also, in the processing of S504, when the after jackpot gaming state flag 203d is off (S504: No), although the winning winning during the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot is in a low probability state Since this is the case, the process proceeds to S506. In the process of S506, the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is acquired (S506), and the process proceeds to S507.

  In the process of S507, the success / failure is predicted by comparing the jackpot random number table acquired in the process of S505 or S506 with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501 (S507). As described above, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 as random values (winning values) that are jackpots when the probability is low. Further, in the high probability big hit random number table 202 a 2, 30 random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276” are given as random numbers (hit values) that become big hits at the high probability. , 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. In the process of S405, the random number value (win value) stored in the acquired jackpot random number table is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401, and if they match, the jackpot Predict that

  If the result of the comparison in S507 is predicted to be a jackpot (S508: Yes), the jackpot type and the variation pattern type are predicted (S509), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S509, first, in the above-described jackpot type table, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability jackpot) associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 is selected. Predict. Next, in the above-mentioned jackpot variation pattern table, the variation pattern type at the time of jackpot associated with the jackpot type predicted earlier and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S501 (various normal reach, Predict various types of super reach, various special reach, 2R fluctuations A to C).

  When it is predicted that it is not a big hit in the process of S508 (S508: No), the stop type at the time of losing and the variation pattern type are predicted (S510), and the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S510, first, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501, the stop type (rear / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete disengagement) is predicted. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The table is set so that the range is different.

  Next, when the winning game state flag acquired in the process of S501 is on, or when the big hit middle winning flag 203g is on and the big hit after game state flag 203d is on, as described above Based on the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table, the stop type predicted in advance and the fluctuation obtained in the processing of S501 from among various short reach, various out of normal reach, various out of super reach, various out of special reach The variation pattern type at the time of detachment associated with the type counter CS1 is predicted.

  On the other hand, when the winning game state flag acquired in the process of S501 is OFF and the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is OFF, or when the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is ON and after the jackpot gaming state flag If 203d is off, based on the deviation (normal) variation pattern table described above, the prediction is made in advance from among short-out, long-out, out-of-normal normal reach, out-of-super reach, and out-of-special reach. The fluctuation pattern type at the time of detachment associated with the stop type and the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501 is predicted.

  In the process of S511, a prefetch command is generated based on the various prediction results predicted in the processes of S507 to S510 (S511). Here, in the prefetch command described with reference to FIG. 8, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and each bit value other than the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. That is, a bit value indicating that the command is a prefetch command, a bit value indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery, and a bit value indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type are set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on (S512). In the processing of S512, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is on (S512: Yes), it is a case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read with the gaming state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, the bit value indicating the precondition for predicting the prefetch command is set according to the state of the post-hit game state flag 203d indicating the game state at the end of the jackpot, and the prefetch command is further set to the voice lamp control device 113. The prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S513).

  Specifically, if the jackpot after gaming state flag 203d is OFF, the bit value “0” is set to the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower 1 byte), and the jackpot after gaming state flag If 203d is on, a bit value “1” is set to a bit indicating a prediction precondition of the prefetch command. Then, when the processing of S513 is completed, the jackpot medium winning prize flag 203g is set to OFF (S514), and the process proceeds to S516.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main controller 110, only the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by the prefetch command. It had been. That is, the prediction precondition was not notified. Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the prediction result of the jackpot lottery from the prefetch command, it cannot determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 the prediction result is obtained.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main controller 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the preconditions for the prefetching is prefetched. The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a command.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is in the low probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low probability random jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is in the high probability state. Is pre-read using the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 and 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  In the process of S512, when the jackpot medium winning flag 203g is off (S512: No), it is a case where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read with the gaming state at the time of winning as a prediction precondition. Therefore, in this case, a bit value indicating a precondition for predicting the prefetch command is set according to the state of the winning game state flag indicating the game state at the time of winning acquired in the process of S501, and the prefetch command is further processed by voice. In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S515).

  Specifically, if the winning game state flag is OFF, a bit value “0” is set in the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command (the most significant bit of the lower 1 byte), and the winning game state flag is If it is ON, a bit value “1” is set in the bit indicating the prediction precondition of the prefetch command. When the process of S513 or S515 described above is executed and the prefetch command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, an external output process (see S801 in FIG. 26) of the main process described later is performed thereafter. When executed, a prefetch command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the process of S515 is completed, the process proceeds to S516. In the process of S516, the prefetch execution flag 203f is set to OFF (S516), the prefetch execution process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  When the main control device 110 prefetches the lottery result of the big hit lottery by the prefetching process shown in FIG. Along with the obtained prediction result, it can be included in the prefetch command and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 and 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result indicated by the prefetch command based on the prediction precondition indicated by the prefetch command.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the main control device 110 prefetches the lottery result of the big hit lottery, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result uses which table 202a1, 202a2. It was not configured to be able to determine whether the product was obtained. That is, the prediction precondition was not stored. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by the look-ahead command, the sound lamp control device 113 also obtains the prediction result using either of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. I couldn't tell if it was.

  However, as long as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changed after the pre-fetching of the lottery result of the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110 even if the prediction precondition is not stored as in the conventional pachinko machine. Both the pre-reading of the lottery lottery results and the jackpot lottery are performed in the same game state in the main controller 110. Accordingly, the main controller 110 always has the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch. Match. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main controller 110. The jackpot lottery prediction was treated as trustworthy.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big win lottery until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Thus, the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch. It becomes unknown whether to do. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main controller 110. So, the jackpot lottery prediction results were treated as unreliable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction preconditions and the post-hit gaming state flag 223c. 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead, Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not they match in the main controller 110, this embodiment can make this determination.

  As a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as credible. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  In addition, with the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23 described above, the start winning with a big win is pre-read with the gaming state at the end of the big win as a precondition for prediction, so the accuracy of prediction of the lottery result can be improved. . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state. For this reason, when the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start win with the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data always indicates a low probability state.

  Therefore, if the lottery result is predicted according to the winning game state flag in the data, the pre-reading prediction precondition is always in a low probability state, so the prediction result is unlikely to match the actual lottery result. Therefore, the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is deteriorated. However, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 cannot determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit. Since the game state is determined, the main controller 110 can determine the game state at the end of the jackpot. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot ends, if there is a jackpot lottery pending in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery that was on hold is one game state set at the end of the jackpot. It is executed in the main controller 110 one by one.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when there is a start win during the jackpot and the look-ahead for the start win is made, it is more likely that the prediction precondition is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than the prediction precondition is always in a low probability state. The possibility that the prediction result of the lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110 can be improved. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be handled as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 can be increased, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used in this embodiment.

  In the pre-reading process shown in FIG. 23 described above, for the winning prize during the big hit, the pre-prediction is performed with the gaming state at the end of the big win as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is improved. Yes. As described above, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, and after that determination, the game state at the end of the jackpot can be prefetched using the prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning prize during the jackpot, the winning prize until the jackpot is started after the jackpot type is determined in the jackpot lottery is pre-read based on the gaming state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition. You may make it do. Thereby, the chance that the main controller 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result can be increased. Therefore, since the number of prediction results handled as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 can be increased, the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be used more suitably.

  In the look-ahead process shown in FIG. 23 described above, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is provided. However, if each process is executed in the single control method in the main controller 110, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is not provided. May be. If the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is not provided, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203e is referred to instead of the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is started in the single task method, another processing (main processing, other interrupt processing, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt processing ends. Since there is no, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired with the start winning is acquired with the start winning with the big win, by referring to the big hit winning flag 203e.

  In the above-described prefetching process, a winning game state flag is provided. However, when each process is executed in the single control method in the main controller 110, the winning game state flag may not be provided. If no winning game state flag is provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that has won the start-up prize, and when the ball starts to win the first entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 Each value of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are acquired. The gaming state flag 203a acquired here is used as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning is a high probability state, and if the winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko at the time of starting winning is shown. It shows that the gaming state of the machine 10 was a low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is started in the single task method, another processing (main processing, other interrupt processing, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt processing ends. Since there is no, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the game state flag 203a does not change after the start winning process (see FIG. 20) described above is started until the prefetching process ends. Therefore, in the prefetch process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. Note that when the winning game state flag is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the process of S207 in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20), so the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S701). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S704). If it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S705), and if not stored (S705: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S712 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S706). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S712. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S813 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (sub control device) (S712). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S713, S714) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S713, S714) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing (S713, S714) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S713, S714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S714). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S710.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S707: Yes), the occurrence information of power-off is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S708). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (sub-control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S709), and the process proceeds to S710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S710, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S710), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S711), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 27, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, roughly divided, a prefetch process, a counter update process, and a power-off process are executed. As an outline, each process of S801 to S807 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S809 and S810 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (sub External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S801). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the pre-read command set in the pre-read process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the previous 4 msec cycle, the fanfare command, the round number command, and the ending command set by the jackpot control process described later are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S802). Next, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the big hit state, the execution of the big hit effect and the variable winning device 65 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is executed (S803). Although the details of the jackpot control process will be described later, in the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the specific winning opening 65a. It is determined whether the ball has won the specified number. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  After the big hit control process is completed, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S804). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening time of the electric accessory is set as the second symbol, or when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the opening time and opening of the electric accessory When the number of times is set, the electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S805). In the first symbol display update processing, when the variation pattern type is set by the processing of S408 of the variation start processing (see FIG. 22) or the processing of S413, the variation display according to the variation pattern type is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type set by the process of S408 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) or the process of S413 ends, and as a result, the fluctuation process (FIG. 21). When the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the process of S312 of (refer to), the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and S407 of the variation start process (see FIG. 22). The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the above process or the processing of S412.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S806). In the second symbol display update process, when the second symbol lottery is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. Stop display (lighting display) on the device 83.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S807). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S807: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S808). If the predetermined time has already passed (S808: Yes), the process proceeds to S801, and the above-described processes after S801 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S808: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S809, S810).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S809). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S810). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S801 to S807 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, whereby the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the process of S807, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S807: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the power-off process after S811 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S811), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S812). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S813), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S814), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S807 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S801 to S806, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S809 and S810 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S801 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initialization process (S701) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S801. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the present embodiment, in the main process, the winning ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S802), the jackpot control process (S803), the electric accessory opening / closing process (S804), the first symbol control process (S805), the second Although the symbol control process (S806) is executed, a part or all of these processes may be executed in the timer interrupt process instead of the main process.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S803) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S803). This jackpot control process (S803) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, the execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and the specific winning a prize (large jackpot) This is a process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is started (S901). Specifically, if the process of S314 of the variation process (see FIG. 21) is executed and the start of the big hit is set, it is determined that the big hit is started. When the jackpot is started in the processing of S901 (S901: Yes), the gaming state at the end of jackpot in the fanfare command is set based on the state of the after-hit gaming state flag 203d (S902).

  In the processing of S902, among the fanfare commands described with reference to FIG. 9, the upper 1 byte indicating the command type and the most significant bit in the lower 1 byte are set. Specifically, first, a bit value indicating that the command is a fanfare command is set, and then, if the jackpot after gaming status flag 203d is off, the gaming status at the end of the current jackpot of the fanfare command If the bit value “0” is set in the bit indicating “L” (the most significant bit of the lower 1 byte) and the gaming status flag 203d after jackpot is ON, the bit indicating the gaming status at the end of the current jackpot in the fanfare command Is set to a bit value “1”. Then, a fanfare command is set (S903), and this process ends.

  The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot based on the received fanfare command. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, it transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When a display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, a fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not started in the processing of S901 (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203e is on and the jackpot is currently being hit (S904). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As described above, the jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and the start of jackpot is set by the process of S315 of the above-described variation process (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, it is set to ON at the timing, and is set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot is finished by the processing of S914 of the jackpot control processing.

  In the processing of S904, if the big hit flag 203e is off and is not big hit (904: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S904, if the big hit flag 203e is on and the big hit is in the middle (S904: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S905). If it is the start timing of a new round (S905: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S906), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S907). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S905 (S905: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S908, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S909), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S908: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S910).

  In the process of S910, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S910: Yes), an ending command is set (S911), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S910 (S910: No), it is determined whether or not to end the current jackpot (S912).

  In the process of S912, if the current big hit is to be ended (S912: Yes), the big hit end is set (S913), and the big hit medium flag 203e is set to OFF (S914). Next, it is determined whether the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is on (high probability state) (S915). As described above, the after-hit gaming state flag 203d indicates whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state or a high probability state when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big jackpot and ends. Flag. In addition, when this jackpot game state flag 203d is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the end of the current jackpot, and when the flag 203d is off, the current jackpot end It sometimes indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state.

  In the process of S915, if the big hit after game state flag 203d is off (S915: No), this process is terminated without doing anything, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is left in the low probability state. As described above, during the jackpot, the gaming state flag 203a is off, so the gaming state is a low probability state. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to set the flag 203a off again at the end of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is on in the process of S915 (S915: Yes), the gaming state flag 203a is set to on (high probability state) (S916), and this process ends. Here, by turning on the gaming state flag 203a, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state at the end of the jackpot.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, if the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is OFF in the processing of S915 (S915: No), this processing is terminated without doing anything, but the gaming state flag 203a may be set to off (low probability state), and this processing may be terminated.

  When the fanfare command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the jackpot control process shown in FIG. 27, information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is included in the fanfare command. Can be sent inclusive. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot based on the received fanfare command. And as mentioned above, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 at the time of jackpot lottery. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current jackpot is completed based on the received fanfare command. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by the fanfare command. When the lottery result is a big hit, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 whether the current big hit is a promising big hit or a normal big hit by the stop type command described above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot in the fanfare command.

  In the present embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by the fanfare command. Notification of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the time of the end of the big jackpot from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by other commands such as a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, and an ending command. You may do it. That is, the main controller 110 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and after the jackpot type is determined, until the sound lamp controller 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is newly provided, and the new command allows the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the end of the current jackpot. The game state may be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1119 (see FIG. 29) is performed by an instant voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). ) Is determined during the execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1116 in FIG. 29), it executes a power-off process in S1119. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1119 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1119 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1119, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1002: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1119, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1119 is executed (see S1118 in FIG. 29). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1119 is executed, the current startup process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then the interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1009 is that when the process from S1004 to S1006 is reached via the process of S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101). If the time has not elapsed (S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1112 without performing the processes in S1102 to S1111. In S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S1102 to S1111 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1112 and the command determination process of S1113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1112 in a short cycle, it is possible to make the setting related to the changing effect without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. In addition, since the process of S1113 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), first, in the previous 1 ms cycle, various commands set by the processing of S1103 to S1113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1109 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1105, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on the reserved lamp 285 is performed according to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is finished, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1108). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process for monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1151), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1152). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1152: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1152: Yes), it is determined that vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10, and a setting is made so that an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 226 (S1153). An error command for notifying the controller 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error is set (S1154), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 29). Thereby, in the display control apparatus 31, the process which displays the error message image which alert | reports a vibration error on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1108) is completed, a lamp editing process is then executed (S1109), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1110). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. Also, when an alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 30) (see S1153), an output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1110, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S1109 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1110 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1112, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1113 is completed, the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is updated (S1114), and the updating process of the ending state counter 223f is executed (S1115). The continuous notice lottery counter 223g is updated by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 127 every time the update process is performed, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). Further, the updating of the ending mode counter 223f is performed so that each time the updating process is performed, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 2, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 2), it is returned to 0. The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g updated by the update process of S1114 is referred to by a continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 32) to be described later, and is used to determine the execution of the continuous notice effect. Further, the value of the ending aspect counter 223f is referred to by an ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) described later, and is used to determine whether the display mode of the ending effect is normal display or fixed effect display.

  When the processing of S1115 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1116). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1116 (S1116: Yes), both the power shutdown flag and the power shutdown processing flag are turned on (S1118), and the power shutdown processing is executed (S1119). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1120), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1116 (S1116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1117: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1117: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1113). This command determination processing (S1113) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In this process, when a prefetch command is received from the main controller 110, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined by the third symbol display device 81, and when an ending command is received from the main controller 110, the ending The display mode in the production is set.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1201). When the variation pattern command is received (S1201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1203). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1201: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). When the stop type command is received (S1204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1206). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1207). Then, when the held ball number command is received (S1207: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the held ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (the fluctuation display hold). The number of times N) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1208). Further, in the processing of S1208, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the held ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1208 is completed, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), every time a start winning is detected, the voice is processed by the processing of S1208. The value of the held ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the held ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the held ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is deviated from the value of the held ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 is detected when the start winning is detected. The value of the held ball number counter 223b of the main controller 110 can be corrected to match the value of the held ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110.

  In the processing of S1207, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1207: No), it is then determined whether or not a prefetch command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1209). When the prefetch command is received (S1209: Yes), the prefetch prediction precondition, the jackpot lottery prediction result, and the variation pattern type prediction result are extracted from the received prefetch command, and these are prefetched. Information is stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S1210). Then, a continuous notice determination process is executed (S1211), and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are displayed in the main controller 110. The acquired values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b, and the acquired gaming state flag 203a is used as the winning gaming state flag. It is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area in which C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored. When the main controller 110 stores data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and the winning game state flag) in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b, separately from the original jackpot lottery. Various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained when the original jackpot lottery is performed from each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved area and the game state flag at the time of winning a prize Is pre-read (predicted).

  When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a prefetch command indicating various information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained by prefetching and prediction preconditions for prefetching is sent from the main control device 110 as an audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the prefetch command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the prefetch prediction prerequisites, the jackpot lottery prediction result, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type from the prefetch command, and uses them as prefetch information. Store in the reserved area of the information storage area 223a.

  As described above, when the prediction precondition is in the low probability state, the main controller 110 uses the low probability random jackpot random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching, while the prediction precondition is in the high probability state. Is pre-read using the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 and 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the prefetch information based on the preconditions for the prefetch information.

  In the continuous notice determination process, based on the look-ahead information stored last in the look-ahead information storage area 223a, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g, the change that is held at that time Whether or not to perform a series of continuous notice effects for the effect is determined.

  If the prefetch command has not been received in the processing of S1209 (S1209: No), it is then determined whether a fanfare command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). When the fanfare command is received (S1212: Yes), the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is extracted from the received fanfare command (S1213), and the extracted gaming state is obtained. Based on this, the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is set (S1214). In the processing of S1214, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot extracted from the fanfare command is “low probability state”, the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is set to OFF, and the jackpot termination time extracted from the fanfare command If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state”, the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is set to ON.

  Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is set at the end of the jackpot in the main control device 110 based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c.

  And as mentioned above, in main controller 110, jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 at the time of jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the jackpot ends and then a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the new jackpot lottery are based on the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. Determined. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 refers to the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main control device 110 after the current jackpot is ended by referring to the after jackpot gaming state flag 223c. Can be determined.

  Next, a display fanfare command for starting a jackpot effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1215), and the process returns to the main process. The display fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the processing of S1212 (S1212: No), it is next determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1216). When the round number command is received (S1216: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1217), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1218), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1216 (S1216: No), it is next determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1219). If an ending command is received (S1219: Yes), an ending setting process for setting the display mode of the ending effect and the like is executed (S1221), and this process ends. In the ending setting process, based on the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a, it is determined whether the display mode of the ending effect is to be displayed normally or to be the definite effect display, and for display according to the determination Ending command is set. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1102) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect of the display mode corresponding to the display ending command on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1219 (S1219: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1220). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  As described above, in the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, when the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is received from the fanfare command. The game state is extracted, and the after-hit game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the main controller 110 determines whether the current jackpot is a promising jackpot or a normal jackpot according to the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Accordingly, when the stop type command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, if the stop type command indicates the jackpot type, the after jackpot gaming state flag 223c is set according to the jackpot type. May be. In the case of such a configuration, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot in the fanfare command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the continuous notice determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice determination processing (S1211). This continuous notice determination process (S1211) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and receives a prefetch command as described above. In such a case, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect.

  In this continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3), which are predetermined conditions described later, is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. If so, it is next determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. If it is determined here that the continuous notice effect is to be started, the continuous notice effect is started. S1302 to S1310 described later are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1311 to S1316 described later start a continuous notice effect. This is a process for determining whether or not to do so.

  Note that (Condition 1) is that execution of the continuous notice effect is not set, and (Condition 2) becomes “big hit” when all the set continuous notice effects are finished, and newly There are two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the fluctuating effects (holding spheres) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last fluctuating effects (holding spheres) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set ( That is, the difference between the value of the held ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 3 or more). (Condition 3) indicates that when all the set continuous notice effects are completed, In addition, among the pre-read information extracted from the newly received pre-read command, the success / failure in the lottery result of the big win lottery becomes “big hit”.

  In the continuous notice determination process, first, prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a (that is, the prediction result of jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the precondition of prefetching) is read (S1301). . Note that the prefetch information stored last in the prefetch information storage area 223a is specified based on the reserved ball counter 223b. That is, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 1, the prefetch information stored in the hold first area is specified as the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Similarly, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 2, the pre-read information stored in the reserved second area, and when the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 3, the pre-read information stored in the reserved third area is When the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 4, the pre-read information stored in the hold fourth area is specified as the pre-read information stored last in the pre-read information storage area 223a.

  Next, in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not the success in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” (S1302). (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “miss” (S1302: No), it is determined whether the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the processing of S1301 is “front / rear miss” (S1303). ). In the process of S1303, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “front / rear out of reach” (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is not “out-of-front / rear reach” but other variation pattern types (S1303: No), this processing is terminated.

  In the processing of S1304, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is substituted for the variable A (S1304), and then the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is substituted for the variable B (S1305). Then, it is determined whether the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223h) is 0 (S1306). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1306: Yes), the continuous notice effect is executed. Since it is not set and satisfies the above (Condition 1), the process proceeds to S1311, and it is determined whether to start the continuous notice effect by the process after S1311.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice counter 223h) is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S1306: No), the execution of the continuous notice effect is already set. Therefore, it is then determined whether or not the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on (S1307). As described above, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on, the game state after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect has been set is “big hit”. In the case where the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is OFF, the gaming state after the variation effect after the continuous notification effect is performed in all the variation effects for which the continuous notification effect is set Indicates that it will be in a “disconnected” state.

  In the processing of S1307, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is on (S1307: Yes), it becomes “hit” when all the set continuous notice effects are completed. The difference between the value of A (that is, the number of reserved balls 223b) and the value of variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223h) is calculated, and the difference is substituted into the variable C (S1308). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1309). As a result, if the variable C is 3 or more (S1309: Yes), the variation effect corresponding to the received prefetch command (hold) Sphere) and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set is determined to be present. Therefore, since it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309 that the above (Condition 2) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the processing of S1311, and the continuous notice effect is started by the processing after S1311. Decide whether or not to do.

  On the other hand, if the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) as a result of the processing of S1309 (S1309: No), the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuously present at this time. Since there are no two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) between the last fluctuating effects (holding balls) for which the execution of the notice effect is set, the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above-described (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect.

  In the process of S1307, if the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is on (S1307: Yes), the game will be a “big jackpot” when all the set continuous notice effects are completed. By this, the expectation by the continuous notice effect that the player holds is temporarily interrupted. However, if (Condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. On the other hand, if there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls), it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, chance chances can be displayed as stop symbols in two or more variable effects performed after the “big hit”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous notice effect, or to enhance the sense of expectation that the player feels about the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1307, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223i is OFF (S1307: No), it becomes “out” when all the set continuous notice effects are completed. In the pre-read information read in the processing of S1301, it is determined whether or not the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “jackpot” (S1310). Then, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “bonus” (S1310: Yes), among the pre-read information read out in the processing of S1301, the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “hits”. From the results of the processing of S1306, the processing of S1307, and the processing of S1309, it can be determined that the above (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S1311, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect by the processes after S1311.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1310, when the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1310: No), the above-described results are obtained from the results of the processing of S1307, the processing of S1308, and the processing of S1311 ( It can be determined that none of the conditions 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect. Here, when the value of the jackpot flag 223i after the notice is OFF (S1307: No), it becomes “disappear” when all the set continuous notice effects are finished. In such a situation, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery among the prefetch information extracted from the newly received prefetch command is “big jackpot”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect that is being executed from ending and “disconnecting”, and subsequently continuing notice effect being performed and “disconnecting” again. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state of “disappearing” continuously after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, when the continuous notice effect is performed after the end of the continuous notice effect, the player can have a strong sense of expectation of being a “big hit”, and the player can continue playing the game. Can be motivated to do.

  Thus, in the processing of S1302 to S1310, it is determined whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is determined. If not satisfied, the continuous notice determination process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, if none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the process after S1311 for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is not executed, and therefore the determination of the start of the continuous notice effect is performed reliably and easily. You can prevent it from being broken. Moreover, since the process after S1311 is abbreviate | omitted, the increase in the processing burden in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 can be suppressed.

  Next, in the processing of S1311 to S1313, it is used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect from the two continuous notice determination tables 222a (the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit or the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing). The continuous notice determination table (see FIG. 10) is selected.

  First, in the process of S1311, it is determined whether or not the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301 is “jackpot” (S1311). Then, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “hit” (S1311: Yes), the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected as the continuous notice determination table used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect (S1312). ). On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “out” (S1311: No), the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing is selected as the continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of the continuous notice effect (S1313). ).

  If the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1311 to S1313, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is acquired (S1314). Then, the continuous notice determination table (the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of big hit or the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of losing) selected in the process of S1312 or the process of S1313 and the value (variation display) of the held ball number counter 223b. The continuous notice determination range is specified on the basis of the number of hold times N), and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice lottery counter 223g (S1315).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect (S1316). In the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1316: No), the process after S1317 is skipped and the command determination process is skipped. Return to. That is, the setting of the continuous notice counter 223h is held as it is. Accordingly, when there is a holding ball set to perform a fluctuating effect notice, a continuous notice effect is performed for the reserved ball, and when such a reserved ball does not exist, a continuous notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is started (S1316: Yes), the number of held balls counter 223b is added to the continuous notice number counter 223h. Is set (S1317). Here, by setting the value of the held ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice number counter 223h by the processing of S1317, all of the variation effects held before the variation effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously displayed. Execution of the notice effect is set. In other words, chances can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuating effects corresponding to the reserved ball held before the reserved ball corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “jackpot” (S1318). If the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big jackpot” (S1318: Yes), the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is set to ON (S1319), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “miss” (S1318: No), the post-notice jackpot flag 223i is set to off (S1320), and this processing is terminated.

  It is possible to set in the post-notice jackpot flag 223i whether the game is “big hit” or “out” when all the set continuous notice effects are ended by the process of S1319 or the process of S1320. . As a result, when the continuous notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1307 is executed, the value of the post-notice big hit flag 223i set here is used (condition 2) or (condition 3) described above. It can be determined whether or not the above is satisfied.

  Next, the ending setting process (S1221) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S1221). This ending setting process (S1221) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1221 in FIG. 31). When the ending command is received, the ending effect is displayed. This is a process for determining the display mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the main control device 110 is determined to be “big hit”, the pachinko machine 10 hits the big hit when the variation effect corresponding to the “big hit” is finished. At the same time, a big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. When the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare effect is first performed, and the player is notified that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a jackpot. Next, as the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a big hit, a round effect is started, and every time a new round is started, the number of rounds this time is notified to the player. Then, when the jackpot (2 rounds or 15 rounds) ends, an ending effect is finally performed, and the player is notified of the end of the jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when this ending effect is performed, a final effect display for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the jackpot lottery that is on hold along with the end of the big hit, or simply a big hit The normal display for notifying the player that the game is over is performed.

  In the ending setting process, first, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S1401), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 ( S1402). In the process of S1402, if the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b is 0 (S1402: No), it is the timing to start the ending effect, but the main controller 110 holds one big winning lottery. Since there is no case, the process proceeds to S1415.

  In the process of S1402, when the value (M) of the held ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S1402: Yes), since one or more big win lotteries are held in the main controller 110, the value is held. The prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one from the jackpot lottery that is in the early order of being held.

  Specifically, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the reserved area with the smallest area number among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Check one by one. In addition, the data corresponding to the time-old start winning is stored in the area with the smaller area number.

  Therefore, first, 1 is set to the variable i (S1403), and the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S1404). Then, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserved i-th area is compared with the gaming state indicated by the post-hit gaming state flag 223c (S1405). As a result of the comparison, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition Then, it is determined whether or not the game state indicated by the after-hit game state flag 223c indicates the same game state (S1406).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the preconditions for the prefetching is controlled by the prefetch command. Notification is made from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. If the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, it means that the main controller 110 uses the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 for prefetching, and the prediction precondition is in a high probability state. Means that prefetching has been performed using the high-probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the prefetch prediction preconditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. are extracted as prefetch information from the prefetch command and stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Stored. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is obtained by using which table 202a1, 202a2 in the main control device 110. Can be determined.

  Further, as described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit in the main control device 110 and then the big hit start timing is reached, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. . In that case, the main controller 110 generates a fanfare command including information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, and transmits the generated command to the sound lamp controller 113. . When the fan lamp command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot from the fanfare command, and the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c is determined according to the gaming state. The state is set. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is set when the big hit ends in the main control device 110, based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c.

  As described above, the main control device 110 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 after the jackpot ends, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot can be determined based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c, so that the main control device 110 newly executes after the end of the current jackpot. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery can also be determined based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c.

  Therefore, in the processing of S1405 described above, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information and the gaming state indicated by the big jackpot gaming state flag 223c. It is possible to compare whether the main controller 110 matches the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching.

  In the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), the jackpot lottery This is a case where the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the lottery result prefetching and the actual jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the lottery lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, since the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is also the same for the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison, the comparison results match, and the prediction result of the big win lottery and the prediction result The corresponding actual jackpot lottery result matches in main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, if the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the after-hit gaming state flag 223c indicate a different gaming state (S1406: No), This is a case where the main controller 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the respective comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result Is unclear in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c indicate the same gaming state (S1406: Yes), as described above, This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S1404 matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main controller 110. Therefore, in this case, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1407).

  In the processing of S1407, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out (S1407: No), 1 is added to the variable i (S1409), and the value of the variable i is It is determined whether the value is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S1410). In the process of S1410, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S1410: Yes), the prefetch information is stored in other reserved areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a. If so, the process returns to S1404, and the prefetch information stored in another reserved area is confirmed.

  In addition, after returning to the process of S1404, each process of S1404-S1410 mentioned above is repeated, and the game state which the prediction precondition stored in the other reservation area (holding 2nd area-holding 4th area) shows Are compared with the gaming state indicated by the after-hit gaming state flag 223c in ascending order of area number.

  On the other hand, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b in the process of S1410 (S1410: No), the prefetch information stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is stored. This is a case where all of the prediction results have been confirmed, but all the prediction results in each prefetch information are out of place. In this case, since there is no prefetch information to be confirmed, the process proceeds to S1415.

  On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot in the process of S1407 (S1407: Yes), the process proceeds to S1411 and a definite effect display is displayed as a display mode of the ending effect. Processing for determining whether to set or not is performed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of pieces of prefetch information are stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and even if each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, if the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big hit in the process of S1407. For example, the repetition of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. That is, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  This is because the “determined effect display” informs the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the jackpot lottery held when the jackpot ends, so the jackpot lottery held in the main controller 110 This is because, as long as there is at least one jackpot, the result of the other jackpot lottery may be anything, and it is not necessary to check the pre-read information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  In addition, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, when the jackpot lottery that has been held is executed and the jackpot is again won, the ending effect determination process is executed during the second jackpot, Therefore, since the remaining prefetch information is confirmed, no problem occurs.

  In addition, if there is a jackpot lottery that is held in the main controller 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, after the running jackpot ends, the jackpot lottery that was on hold is 1 in order. If it is executed one by one, the lottery result will be a big hit in any of the big hit lotteries, and it will be a big hit again. When the big hit is made again, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second big win is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by a fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fanfare command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot from the received fanfare command. Then, the state of the big hit after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110, if the lottery result is a jackpot, and if the jackpot is won again, the game status after the jackpot is reached when the jackpot is won again The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, the jackpot lottery executed after the jackpot lottery in which the lottery result is a jackpot among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110 is subjected to the comparison process of S1405 using the jackpot after-game state flag 223c. However, the comparison result cannot be trusted. Therefore, it does not make sense to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. Thus, in this embodiment, when confirmation of prefetch information is unnecessary, since the confirmation is not performed, execution of an unnecessary process can be suppressed.

  In the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after-game state flag 223c indicate different gaming states (S1406: No), as described above. The main hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be used in the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the look-ahead do not match in the main controller 110. Is the case. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main controller 110. In this case, the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment Even in 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, as will be described later, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be handled as an exceptionally reliable one, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1408). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the big hit post gaming state flag 223c indicate different gaming states. (S1406: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S1408, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, but in the case of S1406: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery May be configured so that the process proceeds to S1415 without performing the process in S1408.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. As such, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big jackpot gaming state flag 223c. Even if the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the corresponding actual jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the jackpot lottery prediction result in the pre-read information is a jackpot, it corresponds to the prediction result. In the actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result will be missed. In other words, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result are not determined whether or not they match in the main controller 110, and the exception is uniquely determined to be out. In particular, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the jackpot lottery prediction result as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in this embodiment, the numerical value that is the winning value in one table 202a1, 202a2 is an outlier in the other table 202a1, 202a2, but the outlier in one table 202a1, 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value that is a win value or an outlier in the other table 202a1, 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, even if the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big-random number table 202a1, and it is determined that the result is out, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a jackpot or not in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the jackpot lottery prediction result as unreliable.

  In the processing of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S1408: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally wrong and reliable. , The process proceeds to S1409. Thus, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately. In that case, it is possible to return to the processing of S1409 and continue the repeated processing of S1404 to S1410. Therefore, the opportunity which can set the display mode of an ending effect to "definite effect display" can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out of place (S1408: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game indicated by the jackpot after game state flag 223c This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of place. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will be a jackpot or not.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, but shifts to the process of S1415, and a process of setting normal display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. As described above, in the ending effect determination process, when it is unclear whether the actual lottery result of the big jackpot lottery will be a big hit or missed, the process does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is confirmed. It is configured not to.

  This is because when one of the jackpot lotteries held in the main control unit 110 is checked in order of the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery from the earlier one in the order of being held, This is because if it becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results are also unknown.

  That is, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, If the lottery result is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent jackpot lottery.

  As described above, the prefetching of the lottery lottery result is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, so when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction results of the remaining jackpot lottery predicted after the prediction result are It becomes unknown. Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results are also unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. There is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the process of S1411, the value of the ending mode counter 223f is acquired (S1411), and the acquired counter value is compared with an ending mode selection table (not shown) (S1412). If the acquired counter value is included in the range in which execution of the confirmed effect display is selected and it is determined to execute the confirmed effect display (S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to S1414. In the process of S1414, the confirmed effect display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1416. In the process of S1413, when the acquired counter value is included in the range for selecting the execution of the normal display and it is determined to execute the normal display (S1413: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1415. In the process of S1415, normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect (S1415), and the process proceeds to S1416.

  In the process of S1416, based on the display mode set by the process of S1414 or the process of S1415, a display ending command for notifying the display control device 114 of the display mode of the ending effect is generated, and the command is displayed. Setting is made for transmission to the control device 114 (S1416). By receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 is controlled so that the ending of the display mode indicated by the display ending command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  According to the above ending effect determination process shown in FIG. 33, in the process of S1405, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is compared with the game state indicated by the big hit post game state flag 223c, so that the big hit lottery The main controller 110 compares whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the pre-fetching of the lottery results match the actual jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the lottery lottery corresponding to the prefetching. it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not memorized in the first place, the pachinko machine from the time when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big win lottery to the time when the actual big win lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. When ten game states change, it becomes unclear in which game state prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Thus, the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch. It becomes unknown whether to do. Accordingly, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main controller 110, so that the conventional sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine In 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the jackpot after-game state flag 223c, so the jackpot random number used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch match. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead, Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not they match in the main controller 110, this embodiment can make this determination.

  When the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same, so that each comparison result And the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as being reliable. In this way, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as reliable. In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  Also, according to the ending effect determination process, a plurality of pre-read information is stored in the hold area of the pre-read information storage area 223a, and even if each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the big win lottery is performed in the process of S1407. If the prediction result is a big hit, the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 can be stopped there. That is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, and if the prediction result is a jackpot, the process does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is because the “confirmed effect display” informs the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the big hit lottery that is being held together with the end of the big win. This is because, as long as at least one jackpot lottery is selected, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be any, and it is not necessary to check the pre-read information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery.

  In addition, even if the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed here, when the jackpot lottery that has been held is executed and the jackpot is again won, the ending effect determination process is executed during the second jackpot, Therefore, since the remaining prefetch information is confirmed, no problem occurs.

  Also, if there is a jackpot lottery that is held in the main controller 110 and the lottery result is a jackpot, after the running jackpot ends, the jackpot lottery that has been put on hold in order 1 If it is executed one by one, the lottery result will be a big hit in any of the big hit lotteries, and it will be a big hit again. When the big hit is made again, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the second big win is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by a fanfare command.

  As described above, when the fanfare command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot from the received fanfare command. Then, the state of the big hit after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. Therefore, among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110, if the lottery result is a jackpot, and if the jackpot is won again, the game status after the jackpot is reached when the jackpot is won again The state of the flag 223c may change. Therefore, the jackpot lottery executed after the jackpot lottery in which the lottery result is a jackpot among the jackpot lotteries held in the main controller 110 is subjected to the comparison process of S1405 using the jackpot after-game state flag 223c. However, the comparison result cannot be trusted. Therefore, it does not make sense to check the prefetch information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, when confirmation of the prefetch information is not required, the confirmation is not performed, and therefore it is possible to suppress unnecessary processing.

  Further, according to the ending effect determination process, when a plurality of pieces of pre-read information are stored in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a, and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the pre-read information in the process of S1406 The game state indicated by the prediction precondition in FIG. 3 is different from the game state indicated by the post-hit game state flag 223c (S1406: No), and in the process of S1408, it is determined that the prediction result of the big win lottery in the prefetch information is a big hit. If it is (S1408: Yes), it will return to the process of S1409 and the repetition process of S1404-S1410 can be continued and performed.

  As described above, in the processing of S1406, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big jackpot gaming state flag 223c, the jackpot used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery This is a case where the main controller 110 does not match the random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main controller 110. In this case, the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment Even in 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the processing of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big jackpot gaming state flag 223c, and the big hit random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the prefetching of the big hit lottery result Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching do not match in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetching information is a jackpot in the processing of S1408. If so, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is lost. That is, in this case, it is not unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110, and it is uniquely determined to be out. In particular, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching are provided. Even if the main control device 110 does not agree, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the prediction result is regarded as a failure and the process returns to S1409, and the processes of S1404 to S1410 can be repeatedly executed. .

  Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the game state indicated by the post-hit game state flag 223c, and the prediction result of the big win lottery in the prefetch information is missed in the process of S1408. If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  As described above, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery Is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent jackpot lottery.

  As described above, since the pre-fetching of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction results of the remaining jackpot lotteries predicted after the prediction result are also displayed. It becomes unknown. Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results are also unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. There is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Specifically, in the above-described ending effect determination process, when a plurality of pre-read information is stored in the hold area of the pre-read information storage area 223a and each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed, the process of S1406 is performed. The gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-reading information is different from the gaming state indicated by the after-hit gaming state flag 223c (S1406: No), and further, in the processing of S1408, the prediction result of the big-hitting lottery in the pre-reading information is off. If it is determined that there is (S1408: No), the repetition of each processing of S1404 to S1410 is stopped there. In other words, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unclear and the prediction result cannot be trusted, the processing does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information cannot be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the ending effect determination process, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery will be a big hit or missed, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect. . As a result, even though the “determination effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and all the jackpot lotteries that were held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  The ending effect determination process described above is executed when an ending command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. The ending command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when it is time to start the ending effect. The Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, but is executed after waiting immediately before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the big hit, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times), so it is executed at the timing when the big hit ends. If the pre-reading information is acquired from the pre-reading information storage area 223a after waiting until immediately before the start of the ending effect, four pieces of pre-reading information can be acquired in most cases.

  Therefore, the possibility that a lot of pre-read information can be acquired is higher than the case where the ending effect determination process is executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, so that the possibility of branching to Yes in the process of S1407 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of “definite effect display” in the ending effect, so if any of the pending jackpot lotteries is made after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot This will increase opportunities for players to have a sense of expectation of becoming. In addition, every time a jackpot lottery is held, the chances of making the player feel awkward can be increased, and the opportunity for the player to increase the expectation that the next will be a big hit can also be increased. Can be increased.

  Moreover, although the ending effect determination process described above is configured to be executed when an ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the ending effect determination process determines the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, it is sufficient that the process is executed and ended before the ending effect is started. In other words, it may be executed any time as long as it ends before the ending effect is started after the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  In addition, in the main controller 110 of the present embodiment, every time the big hit lottery associated with entering the first entrance 64 is put on hold, the lottery result is prefetched, and the lottery result obtained by the prefetch ( A process of notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the (prediction result) is performed. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 performs “determined effect display” in the ending effect based on the prediction result obtained by the prefetching in the main control device 110 immediately before starting the ending effect, or “ A complicated process such as a process of determining a display mode for performing “normal display” is performed. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the jackpot lottery that is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the jackpot lottery associated with entering the first entrance 64), while the voice If the MPU 221 having a high processing capability is used for the lamp control device 113, the display condition determination conditions in the ending effect can be easily set to various aspects.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, an example of the flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process will be described. Each of FIGS. 34 to 37 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the display mode of the ending effect is determined in the ending effect determination process. In the example shown in FIGS. 34 to 37, the description is started assuming that the start winning is not held in the pachinko machine 10.

  In FIG. 34 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and the variation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. The state where the start winning prizes G, H, and I are generated during the execution of the variation effect is shown. In the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize G, the lottery result will be disregarded regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, and in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize H, the pachinko machine If the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will be lost, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be a probable big hit. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize I, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result is lost. On the other hand, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit. Shall be.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the start winning G occurs during the execution of the variation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state but is not a big hit. When it is performed, a low probability state that is a gaming state at the time of starting winning is selected as a precondition for prediction, and prefetching is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize G is lost. When the pre-reading is completed, a pre-read command corresponding to the start winning prize G is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction preconditions indicated by the pre-read command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, when the start winning H is generated, as in the case of the starting winning G, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the low probability state. A low-probability state, which is a gaming state at the time of starting winning, is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning H is a promising big hit, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start win H is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and is predicted by the prefetch command. Preconditions, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Also, when the start prize I is generated, as in the case of the start prize G, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in a low probability state. A low-probability state, which is a gaming state at the time of starting winning, is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize I is normally a big hit, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start winning prize I is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and is predicted by the prefetch command. Preconditions, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when the big hit effect is started, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Since this jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state after the jackpot is ended, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is originally a low probability state, even if the jackpot effect is started, the gaming state continues to be in a low probability state. In addition, since the big hit this time is usually a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the big hit effect ends. When the jackpot presentation ends, first, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize G is performed, a variable presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, and then a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize H is performed. Fluctuation effects accompanying the lottery are executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize I is performed, and a variation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, since it is obtained from the pre-read information stored earlier in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a, first, in the first process of S1404, the start prize G is obtained. Corresponding jackpot lottery prediction results and prediction preconditions are acquired. Then, in the first process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start win G matches the gaming state at the end of the big win, so the prediction result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start win G matches the actual lottery result of the big win lottery. .

  However, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize G is out of place, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize H The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state at the end of the jackpot (low probability state). Also in this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning H matches the game state at the end of the big win, so the prediction result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start winning H matches the actual lottery result of the big win lottery. . Here, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the start winning prize H is a promising big hit.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates a jackpot In addition, it is configured to determine whether or not to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. In addition, other prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is not checked. This is because the “confirmed effect display” informs the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the jackpot lottery that is being held together with the end of the jackpot, so at least in the jackpot lottery that is on hold, This is because there is no need to check the lottery result for other pre-read information if there is one big hit.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the process of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, and the process proceeds to S1411 to determine whether or not to set the confirmed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect. Done. That is, in the current ending effect determination process, the prefetch information corresponding to the start winning prize I is not referred to, so that “determined effect display” can be performed in the ending effect and execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the confirmed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is finished, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially Once done, it will be a big win in any lottery. Therefore, even though the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player wins the lottery result when any of the pending jackpot lotteries is made after the jackpot ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be relieved every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes a jackpot after the jackpot ends. Even if the lottery result is out of the game, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 35 will be described. In FIG. 35 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. The state where the start winning prizes J, K, and L are generated during the execution of the variation effect is shown. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize J, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result is lost. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize K, the lottery result will be disregarded regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. Also, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning prize L, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will be a promising big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will be lost. Shall be.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the start prize J occurs during the execution of the variation effect, it is not a big hit and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. For the prediction precondition, a high probability state that is a gaming state at the time of starting winning is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize J is usually a jackpot. When the pre-reading is completed, a pre-read command corresponding to the start winning prize J is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction precondition indicated by the pre-read command, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, when the start prize K is generated, as in the case of the start prize J, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in a high probability state. A high probability state that is a gaming state at the time of starting winning is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize K is lost, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize K is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the prefetch command The conditions and the prediction result of the big hit lottery are stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, when the start winning L is generated, similarly to the start winning J, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not a big probability and the pre-reading for the start winning L is performed as a precondition for prediction. A high probability state that is a gaming state at the time of starting winning is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start winning L is a probable big hit, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start win L is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction indicated by the prefetch command. Preconditions, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when the big hit effect is started, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Since this jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state after the jackpot is ended, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a high probability state to a low probability state when the jackpot effect is started. In addition, since the big hit this time is usually a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the big hit effect ends. When the jackpot presentation ends, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize J is performed, and a variable presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed, followed by a jackpot lottery with the start prize K, Fluctuation effects accompanying the lottery are executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize L is performed, and a variation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, since the pre-read information stored in the pre-read information storage area 223a is acquired from the stored pre-read information in the earlier order, first, in the first process of S1404, the start prize J is determined. Corresponding jackpot lottery prediction results and prediction preconditions are acquired. Then, in the first process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize J is different from the gaming state at the end of the big win, so the prediction result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start winning J does not match the actual lottery result of the big win lottery.

  However, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), even if the prediction precondition and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize J is a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the pre-reading prediction precondition does not match the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result is lost.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, the random value (the value of the counter C1), which is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, is off when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. Similarly, the random value (the value of the counter C1) that is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state is out of order when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is lost.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, in the second process of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize K and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquisition is performed. The predicted prediction condition made is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. However, even in this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning K does not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, this time, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the lottery result of the big hit lottery corresponding to the start winning prize K is lost.

  As described above, if the preconditions for prefetching do not match the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out of place, the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery It will be unclear whether will be a big hit or missed.

  In the ending effect determination process described above, if it is unclear whether the actual lottery lottery result will be a big hit or missed, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, and the prediction result remains unknown. The pre-reading information is not checked. Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S1404 to S1410, but shifts to the process of S1415, and the process of setting the normal display as the display mode of the ending effect is performed. That is, since the pre-read information corresponding to the start winning prize L is not referred to in the current ending effect determination process, execution of unnecessary processes can be suppressed.

  Next, FIG. 36 will be described. In FIG. 36 (a), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a promising jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, and the start winning prizes M, N, and O are generated during the execution of the jackpot presentation according to the jackpot. Shows the state. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize M, the lottery result will be disregarded regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. If the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, the lottery result will be lost, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, the lottery result will normally be a big hit. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize O, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result is a promising big hit, while if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result is lost. Shall be. As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, the lottery lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the start winning M is generated during the execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since the jackpot is being hit, the start winning M is pre-read. In such a case, a high-probability state that is a gaming state at the time of jackpot end is selected as a precondition for prediction, and prefetching is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize M is lost. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-read command corresponding to the start winning prize M is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction preconditions indicated by the pre-read command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, when the start prize N is generated, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state as in the case of the start prize M, but since it is a big hit, if the pre-reading is performed for the start prize N, the prediction precondition is The high probability state that is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize N is lost, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize N is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the prefetch command The conditions and the prediction result of the big hit lottery are stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, when the start winning O is generated, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state as in the case of the starting win M, but since it is a big hit, if the pre-reading for the start winning O is performed, the prediction precondition is The high probability state that is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start prize O becomes a probable big hit, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start prize O is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and is predicted by the prefetch command. Preconditions, prediction results of jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the jackpot effect has already been executed. However, before the jackpot effect is started, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Since this jackpot is a promising jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a high probability state at the end of the jackpot, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. . Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state during the jackpot presentation, although the jackpot lottery is not performed. In addition, since this jackpot is a promising jackpot, at the end of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a low probability state to a high probability state. When the jackpot presentation ends, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize M is performed, and a variable presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed. Subsequently, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize N is performed, and the jackpot Fluctuation effects accompanying the lottery are executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize O is performed, and a variation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, since it is obtained from the pre-read information stored earlier in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223a, first, in the first process of S1404, the start prize M is obtained. Corresponding jackpot lottery prediction results and prediction preconditions are acquired. Then, in the first process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start win M and the game state at the end of the big win match, so the prediction result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start win M matches the actual lottery result of the big win lottery. .

  However, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize M is out of place, in the second processing of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize N The prediction precondition is acquired, and in the second processing of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot. Also in this comparison, since the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize N matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize N matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery. .

  However, this time as well, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start winning prize N is out of place, so in the third processing of S1404, the big win lottery corresponding to the start win O is selected. The prediction result and the prediction precondition are acquired, and the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (high probability state) at the end of the jackpot in the third processing of S1405. Also in this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize O matches the gaming state at the end of the jackpot, so the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning O matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery. . Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize O is a promising jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates a jackpot In addition, it is configured to determine whether or not to set “determined effect display” as the display mode of the ending effect. Therefore, in this case, as described above, the process of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, and the process proceeds to S1411 to determine whether or not to set the confirmed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect. Done.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the confirmed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is finished, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially Once done, it will be a big win in any lottery. Therefore, even though the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player wins the lottery result when any of the pending jackpot lotteries is made after the jackpot ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be relieved every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes a jackpot after the jackpot ends. Even if the lottery result is out of the game, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

  Next, FIG. 37 will be described. In FIG. 37 (a), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a normal jackpot, and a variation effect corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. The state where the start winning prize P is generated during the execution of the variation effect is shown. In addition, the variation presentation corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot, and the start winning prizes Q and R are generated during the execution of the jackpot presentation accompanying the jackpot. In the big hit lottery associated with the start winning prize P, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result is usually a big hit, whereas if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result is lost. In the jackpot lottery associated with the start winning prize Q, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the lottery result is lost, whereas if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the lottery result Is a promising big hit. In addition, in the jackpot lottery accompanying the start winning R, the lottery result will be disregarded regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, although the big hit lottery is not performed, the gaming state is a low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning P is generated during the execution of the variation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. A high-probability state is selected as a condition, and prefetching is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize P is usually a jackpot. Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a pre-read command corresponding to the start winning prize P is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. It is stored in the first reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when the big hit effect is started, a fanfare command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. Since this jackpot is usually a jackpot, the fanfare command includes information indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state after the jackpot is ended, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Note that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes from a high probability state to a low probability state when the jackpot effect is started. In addition, since the big hit this time is usually a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to be in a low probability state even if the big hit effect ends.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the start winning Q is generated during the execution of the jackpot effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, but since the jackpot is being hit, the start winning Q is pre-read. In this case, a low-probability state that is a gaming state at the time of jackpot end is selected as a precondition for prediction, and prefetching is performed. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q is a promising jackpot. When the pre-reading is completed, a pre-read command corresponding to the start winning prize Q is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction preconditions indicated by the pre-read command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, etc. It is stored in the second reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In addition, when the start winning R is generated, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state as in the case of the starting win Q. The low-probability state that is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is selected and prefetched. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning R is lost, and a prefetch command corresponding to the start win R is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the prediction premise indicated by the prefetch command The conditions, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the like are stored in the third reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. When the jackpot presentation ends, first, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize P is performed, and a variable presentation with the jackpot lottery is executed. Subsequently, the jackpot lottery with the start winning prize Q is performed, and the jackpot Fluctuation effects accompanying the lottery are executed. Thereafter, a jackpot lottery with the start winning prize R is performed, and a variation effect accompanying the jackpot lottery is executed.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, since the pre-read information stored in the pre-read information storage area 223a is acquired from the stored pre-read information in the earlier order, first, in the first process of S1404, the start prize P is obtained. Corresponding jackpot lottery prediction results and prediction prerequisites are acquired. Then, in the first process of S1405, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot indicated by the fanfare command. In this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start winning prize P is different from the gaming state at the end of the big win, so the prediction result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start winning P does not match the actual lottery result of the big win lottery.

  However, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), even if the prediction precondition and the gaming state at the end of the jackpot do not match, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize P is a jackpot. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the pre-reading prediction precondition does not match the gaming state at the time of the jackpot end, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot, in the actual jackpot lottery , The lottery result is lost. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is lost.

  Therefore, in the ending effect determination process, in the second process of S1404, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q and the prediction precondition are acquired, and in the second process of S1405, the acquisition is performed. The predicted prediction condition made is compared with the gaming state (low probability state) at the end of the jackpot. In this comparison, the prediction precondition corresponding to the start win Q matches the game state at the end of the big win, so the prediction result of the big win lottery corresponding to the start win Q matches the actual lottery result of the big win lottery. . Here, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the start winning prize Q becomes a probable bonus jackpot.

  As described above, in the ending effect determination process, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is the jackpot In this case, it is configured to determine whether or not “determined effect display” is set as the display mode of the ending effect. In this case, the remaining prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is not checked. This is because the “determined effect display” informs the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the jackpot lottery held when the jackpot ends, so the jackpot lottery held in the main controller 110 This is because, as long as there is at least one jackpot, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be any, and it is not necessary to check the lottery result for the remaining pre-read information.

  Therefore, in this case, as described above, the process of S1404 to S1410 is stopped, and the process proceeds to S1411 to determine whether or not to set the confirmed effect display as the display mode of the ending effect. Done. That is, in the current ending effect determination process, the prefetch information corresponding to the start winning prize R is not referred to, so that “determined effect display” can be performed in the ending effect and execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  Then, in the ending effect determination process, when the display mode of the ending effect is set to the confirmed effect display, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is finished, and the jackpot lottery held at the end of the jackpot effect is sequentially Once done, it will be a big win in any lottery. Therefore, even though the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  Then, when the “final effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the player wins the lottery result when any of the pending jackpot lotteries is made after the jackpot ends. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the player can be relieved every time the held jackpot lottery is performed until the lottery result becomes a jackpot after the jackpot ends. Further, even if the lottery result is out of the game, every time the jackpot lottery is performed, the expectation that the next will be a jackpot increases, so the player's interest can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1311). This variable display setting process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1708 is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1709). When the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1709: Yes), the process proceeds to S1711. On the other hand, when the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “out” (S1709: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1710: Yes), since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, the chance is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1712), the process proceeds to S1713. By this processing of S1712, the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the chance (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left The symbols are set to “3”, “4”, “1”) in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol used as the chance chance can be displayed as the continuous notice effect when the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1710, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1710: No), when the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (in the continuous notice number counter 223h). Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to S1711. In the process of S1711, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1713.

  If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 in the process of S1711, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. Similarly to the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main controller 110 is set.

  In the processing of S1713, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1713). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1714: Yes), the continuous notice number counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1715), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 (S1714: No), the process of S1715 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1112). This variable display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S1507. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1502), and then the variation pattern in the process of S1203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1503).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1504). When receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command for display. Then, display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1505), and the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is shifted (S1506). In the processing of S1506, the prefetch information stored in the hold first area to the hold fourth area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift prefetch information. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1507.

  In the processing of S1507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1507). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1507: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, and therefore, this variation display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1508). The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1509).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the processing of S1509 is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1510). When the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “big hit” (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the acquired stop type is a stop type corresponding to “out” (S1510: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511).

  As a result, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 2 or more (S1511: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect, so the chance item is set as the stop type of the variable effect. (S1513), the process proceeds to S1514. By the processing of S1513, the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the symbol on the middle line L2 is left. The symbols are set to “3”, “4”, “1”) in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol used as the chance chance can be displayed as the continuous notice effect when the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1511, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is less than 2 (S1511: No), the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (in the continuous notice number counter 223h). Since the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 0), the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1512), and the process proceeds to S1514.

  If the value of the continuous notice count counter 223h is 1 by the processing of S1512, it is the last variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, and therefore, the chance item is not set as the stop type, and the continuous notice count is set. Similarly to the case where the value of the counter 223h is 0, the stop type notified from the main controller 110 is set.

  In the process of S1514, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1514). . When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223h is 1 or more (S1515: Yes), the continuous notice number counter The value of 223h is decremented by 1 (S1516), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice counter 223h is 0 (S1515: No), the process of S1516 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 52. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1601), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1701.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1702, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1601 in FIG. 39). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1602 in FIG. 39) (S1705), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S1601), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1702 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1701. The processing of S1703 to S1705 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1702.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1703 to S1705 without performing the processes of S1701 and S1702. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1603). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1603, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1604). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1604, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 50A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3102 in FIG. 50A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 13 is drawn. Determination processing (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and simple display setting processing (see S1909 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is received, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C is immediately displayed during the variation production period. A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S1605, interrupt permission is set (S1606). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 18) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S1901: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1903) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S1902), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S1903), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S1902) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S1904). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S1903) or the simple display setting process (S1909). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S1905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1906). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S1905) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1907). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1907, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15 probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, out of front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to the reach, complete losing, chance chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1901: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S1908) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S1909) is executed, and in S1904 Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46, the details of the above-described command determination process (S1902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2001: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2002), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2003).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S2004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2005), the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2005) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2101, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2101 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2101 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2103, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2105). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2106), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2105, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2101. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2102. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2104, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2004 (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2006). If there is a display stop type command (S2006: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2007), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) (S2201), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2202).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2202 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2203).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2202 is described. In the task process (S1904), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2203, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15 probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, reach out of front / rear out of reach, complete out, chance chance) Is a jackpot stop type (S2204), and if it is a jackpot stop type (S2204: Yes), the transfer start of the image data used in the fanfare effect in the on state is set to the normal image. The fanfare data transfer flag 223i notified to the transfer setting process (S3103) is set to ON (S2205), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not a jackpot stop type (S2204: No), the process of S2205 is skipped, the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on this fanfare data transfer flag 223i, image data to be used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the large effect change effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  The display fanfare command for instructing the start of the fanfare effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is completed, so that the display fanfare command is received. Therefore, if the image data used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time is generated from the end of the change effect until the fanfare effect is started, and the player can operate. There was a risk of anxiety about whether it was stopped or a sense of incongruity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device In 81, control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is completed before the fluctuating effect that is a big hit is completed. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the process of S2202.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “big hit” is set, the stop symbol corresponding to the “big hit” is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is “disconnected”. This would cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “big hit”, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete loss, in fact, if it is a “big hit”, a stop symbol of a complete failure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even so, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “hit” so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2006 that there is no display stop type command (S2006: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2008). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2008: Yes), the fanfare command process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command process (S2009) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. This fanfare command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2303), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2304). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2305), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2304, the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set fanfare display data table is stored in the character ROM 2 in advance. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the fanfare command process is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the fanfare effect until the start of the round effect. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is sent from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 15 rounds or 2 rounds). Since the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, the ending effect is started after the round effect is completed. A lot of waiting time has occurred, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when a display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that time until the jackpot variation display is finished in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). Or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player feels uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped or feels uncomfortable. There is no. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2008 that there is no display fanfare command (S2008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S2010). If there is a round number command for use (S2010: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S2011), and the processing returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S2401). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2402).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2401, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2405), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2010 that there is no display round number command (S2010: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2012). If there is an ending command (S2012: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2013), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2013) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S2503). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display form of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2503. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2405). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2406), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2012 that there is no display ending command (S2012: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2014). If there is a change command (S2014: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2015), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2015) will be described. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3103) of the change of the back image due to reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2601). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2602), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2601 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2602. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S2602, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2602, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2014 that there is no rear image change command (S2014: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2016), and there is an error command. If (S2016: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2017), and the process returns to S2001.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2017) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2701). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2702), and the error command The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2701, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2702 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2702, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2016 that there is no error command (S2016: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2018), and the processing returns to S2001.

  In the process of S2001 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2001: Yes). ), The processing of S2002 to S2018 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2001 to S2018 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2001 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 13 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 43 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 43 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2102, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S1903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2801). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2801: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S2802 to S2804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2801: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S2802), and then S2803 to S2804. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed. In the process of S2803, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2803). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2803: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S2804).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2901).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required. In the warning image setting process, after the process of S2901, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2902), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S2804) or in the process of S2803, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805. In S2805, pointer update processing is executed (S2805).

  Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3001). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3001, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3002). As a result, if it is End information (S3002: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3003). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3003: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3005), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3003 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S3003: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3006, the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3002: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2806). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content acquired in the processing of S2806 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S2807), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2808). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S2808: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S2808: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S2809).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S2809: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect is being performed. The setting is made (S2810), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2811). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2812), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2813). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2814), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S2815), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2815 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S1904), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set in S2815 is specified and the stop effect of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2809, if the confirmation display flag is on rather than on (S2809: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S2816). If the demo display flag is off (S2816: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S2817), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2818). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2819). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2820), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2821), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S2816, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2816: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S1909) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 13B and 13C) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, the details of the transfer setting process (S1905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3101: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3102), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3101, that is, if it is off (S3101: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3103), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3102) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3102).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3201), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3201: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has been completed (S3202). In the process of S3202, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3202 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3202: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to S3203. Also, as a result of the process of S3201, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3201: No), the process proceeds to S3203.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3203). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3203: No), that A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3204), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing in S3203 (S3203: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3205), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S1908 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see S1909 in FIG. 41B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 46) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 47 to 49) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51) (see S3101: No in FIG. 50A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3103), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3103).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S2805) of the display setting process (S1903) executed previously is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S3301). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3302), and if it is transfer data information (S3302: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3303) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

  In the process of S3302, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3302: No), the processes of S3303 and S3304 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3305. In the process of S3305, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3305), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3305: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3306).

  In the process of S3306, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed by the process of S3306 (S3306: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to S3307. Also, as a result of the processing of S3305, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3305: No), the processing proceeds to S3307.

  In the processing of S3307, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3307). If the transfer start flag is on (S3307: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3308), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3303 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3317. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3307: No), it is then determined whether or not the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309).

  If the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 42). As a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is changed. This means that it is determined that the jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3309: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set to off (S3310), and then the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as transfer target image data (S3311). Furthermore, the top address (storage source top address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the fanfare effect and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired. (S3312), the process proceeds to S3317.

  In the process of S3309, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but off (S3309: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3313). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3313: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3313: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after setting the back image change flag to off (S3314), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3315). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3316), and the process proceeds to S3317.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3315, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the processing of S3317, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3317). The determination in the processing of S3317 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3317 (S3317: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3317 (S3317: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3318). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3318, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3319), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the above-described drawing process (S1906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 18 is generated (S3401). In other words, in the process of S3401, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1904). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1905), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3402). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S3402 (S3403). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins (start win) in the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new start win. , CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning gaming state flag) are acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110, the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern prior to the big hit lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110. When prefetching is completed, various information obtained by the prefetching (prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) and prediction preconditions for the prefetching are controlled by the main controller 110 from the main controller 110 by the prefetching command. The device 113 is notified.

  As described above, the prediction precondition included in the prefetch command indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is a precondition for the prediction when the lottery result or the like is predicted in the prefetch. If the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, it means that the main controller 110 uses the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 to perform prefetching. If the prediction precondition is in a high probability state, This means that prefetching has been performed using the high-probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2.

  When the pre-read command is received in the sound lamp control device 113, various information (pre-prediction prediction preconditions, prediction result of jackpot lottery, prediction result of variation pattern type) is extracted as pre-read information from the pre-read command, The prefetch information is newly stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, the prediction precondition is stored as prefetch information together with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the prefetch information is used in the sound lamp control device 113, the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is set. By referring to the table, it is possible to determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes a big hit in the main control device 110, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the big hit type at the end of the big hit. In the main controller 110, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. When the jackpot lottery is performed, the jackpot lottery is performed using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state newly set at the end of the jackpot.

  When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a big hit in the main controller 110, the start of the fanfare effect and the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot are voiced from the main controller 110 by the fanfare command. The lamp control device 113 is notified. When the fan lamp command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state from the fanfare command, and the state of the big hit after gaming state flag 223c is set according to the gaming state. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that is set at the end of the jackpot in the main control device 110 based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c.

  As described above, the main control device 110 determines the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, when a new jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 after the jackpot ends, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot can be determined based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c, so that the main control device 110 newly executes after the end of the current jackpot. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery can also be determined based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c.

  As described above, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, when the prefetch information is used, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the actual big hit lottery corresponding to the prefetch It is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 that are scheduled to be used in FIG.

  However, since the conventional pachinko machine does not store the prediction preconditions, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching will be used. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 of the main control device 110 cannot be determined to match and may become unknown.

  That is, the conventional pachinko machine and the present pachinko machine 10 are configured such that the winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64 is held up to a plurality of times (up to four times in the present pachinko machine 10). In the main control device 110, if there is a pending start prize when the ball newly wins the first entrance 64 (start prize), the lottery of the jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize After the results are prefetched, the jackpot lottery associated with the new start prize is performed after all the jackpot lotteries associated with the respective start prizes that have been held at the time of the new start prize are completed.

  Then, the jackpot lottery associated with each start prize that was on hold at the time of the new start prize is executed in the main controller 110. If any lottery result becomes a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 The game state is newly set. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may change before and after the jackpot. Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, a jackpot lottery is performed with a new starting prize in the changed gaming state. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the big hit lottery associated with the start winning prize will not match.

  As described above, in the main controller 110 of the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning, Further, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are configured to be determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the new start prize and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery accompanying the new starting prize do not match, it is used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery The main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching are not matched in the main controller 110.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big hit lottery, only the process of obtaining the prediction result is performed, and the prediction result indicates which table 202a1, 202a2 It was not configured to be able to discriminate whether it was obtained or not. Therefore, after the prediction result is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 also determines which table 202a1, 202a2 the prediction result is obtained from. could not.

  However, even in a conventional pachinko machine, both the pre-fetching of the jackpot lottery result and the jackpot lottery are performed while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change after the main control device 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The main control device 110 is performed in the same gaming state. Accordingly, the main controller 110 always has the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch. Match. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result coincide with each other in the main control device 110. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The jackpot lottery prediction results were treated as credible.

  On the other hand, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not stored, the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big win lottery until the actual big win lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 changes, it becomes unclear in which gaming state the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Thus, the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch. It becomes unknown whether to do.

  Accordingly, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result may be different in the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device of the conventional pachinko machine In 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable. Then, in the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, by refraining from using the prediction result, a process unrelated to the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery (for example, (For example, a continuous notice effect and an ending effect) were suppressed. Therefore, the prefetching of the lottery effect lottery result and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery are useless.

  In contrast to such a conventional pachinko machine, in the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, when the pre-read information is used in the audio lamp control device 113, the big hit random number table 202a1, used in the pre-fetch of the lottery result of the big win lottery It can be determined whether the main controller 110 matches 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the look-ahead, Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not they match in the main controller 110, this embodiment can make this determination.

  As a result of the determination, if the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, it is highly possible that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110. it is conceivable that. Therefore, even in the case of a prediction result that is treated as unreliable in a conventional pachinko machine, the present pachinko machine 10 may be treated as reliable, and therefore, in this embodiment, the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be preferably handled. it can. As a result, the frequency with which the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be used is higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and the opportunity for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, if there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result are different in the main controller 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was treated as unreliable, and the prediction result was not used. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.

  When solving this by a method different from the present embodiment, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured as follows so that more reliable prediction results can be handled in the audio lamp control device 113.

  That is, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively. It may be possible to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to, and notify the sound lamp control device 113.

  If comprised in this way, when using the prediction result of a jackpot lottery in the audio lamp control device 113, one of the two prediction results can always be treated as reliable. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Further, by using this reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress problems such as execution of a process (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result.

  However, as described above, when the main control device 110 prefetches the lottery result of the big hit lottery, it is stored in the first hit random number counter C1 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 as in the case of the big hit lottery. A process of comparing the winning values one by one is performed. Therefore, every time a new start prize is generated, a process of comparing the first winning random number counter C1 and the winning values stored in the two big winning random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 one by one is a maximum of 33. Must be repeated repeatedly. Therefore, every time a new start prize is generated, the comparison process may take a long time, and time may be wasted.

  In addition, the main control device 110 uses the two jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to obtain the prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2. When used, only one prediction result is used. Therefore, a comparison process that may be performed in the main controller 110 in a time-consuming manner is wasted. Further, every time a new start prize is received, the main control device 110 obtains two prediction results, but the sound lamp control device 113 uses only one of the prediction results, so that a useless prediction result always occurs. Therefore, the number of prediction results that are wasted increases compared to the case of a conventional pachinko machine.

  Further, since the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, respectively, a larger storage area is required than in the prior art. In addition, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the prediction results corresponding to the two tables 202a1 and 202a2, so that data to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 increases. For this reason, there is a possibility that data to be preferentially transmitted cannot be transmitted, and the control burden on the main controller 110 also increases. In addition, since the data received by the voice lamp control device 113 increases, the control burden increases.

  As described above, when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery results of the jackpot lottery, the prediction results corresponding to the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are obtained using both the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine which table each of the two prediction results corresponds to and notify the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 is trusted. Although more prediction results can be handled, other problems such as increased processing time and control burden arise.

  Further, when solving by another method, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and the lottery result is a big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is determined according to the big hit type. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the time of the end of the big hit to pre-read each pending start prize. It is conceivable to redo each and notify each of the prediction results obtained by the redo from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  If comprised in this way, in the main controller 110, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 will change from when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is pre-read until the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. As a result, even if the look-ahead of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change is unreliable in the sound lamp control device 113, the prediction of the jackpot lottery notified again from the main control device 110 instead. The result can be used as trustworthy.

  The prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again is obtained in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot ends in the main controller 110. is there. Therefore, since the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery notified again and the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 predicts the jackpot lottery prediction result. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Further, by using this reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress problems such as execution of a process (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10, every time the lottery result of the jackpot lottery wins, the main control device 110 re-reads the pre-reading for each pending start prize, and the prediction results obtained by the redemption are the main results. The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 again. Therefore, the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery subject to redoing and the prediction result are wasted.

  Therefore, useless processing is performed in the main controller 110, and a control burden is imposed. Also, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a useless prediction result and stores it in the RAM 223. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 also performs useless processing, which is a control burden. It takes. In addition, data transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 increases. For this reason, there is a possibility that data to be preferentially transmitted cannot be transmitted, and the control burden on the main controller 110 also increases. In addition, since the data received by the voice lamp control device 113 increases, the control burden increases.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the main control device 110 uses the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the current big hit to use each pending start prize. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to re-read each of the pre-reads and notify the sound lamp control device 113 of each prediction result obtained by the redo, the sound lamp control device 113 is trusted. Although more prediction results can be handled, other problems such as wasteful processing and increased control burden arise.

  Further, when solving by another method, for example, it is conceivable to configure the pachinko machine 10 as follows so that the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and the lottery result is a big hit, the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit is determined according to the big hit type. Therefore, the main controller 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 wins the jackpot random number table corresponding to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot in the main controller 110. It is conceivable to use 202a1 and 202a2 to pre-read each pending start prize and to notify each prediction result from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113.

  If comprised in this way, only when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes the big hit in the main controller 110 and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to change, it is possible to pre-read each pending start prize. . The prediction result of the jackpot lottery obtained by this prefetching is obtained in the same table 202a1, 202a2 as the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the new jackpot lottery after the jackpot is completed in the main controller 110. . Therefore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. Can be treated as Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. Further, by using this reliable prediction result, it is possible to suppress problems such as execution of a process (for example, production) unrelated to the actual lottery lottery result.

  However, only when the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes a big win in the main controller 110, the lottery result of the big hit lottery is prefetched, and the number (frequency) of prefetching is reduced. Then, since the number of prediction results of the jackpot lottery notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is also reduced, the frequency of using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is decreased in the sound lamp control device 113, and the above-described continuous Opportunities to perform the notice effect will decrease. Therefore, there is a possibility that the interest of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  As explained above, the main controller 110 normally does not pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and only when the pachinko machine 10 wins the jackpot, the main controller 110 corresponds to the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. When the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to pre-read each pending start prize using the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 to be notified and notify the prediction results from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. Another problem is that although the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results, the frequency of using the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is reduced, and the interest of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. Occurs.

  As described above, in the three solutions different from the above-described embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle more reliable prediction results. There arises another problem that processing time, useless processing, a control burden increases, and the interest of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the prefetch command, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like, further including information indicating the precondition of the prefetching, Although information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the information indicating the preconditions for prefetching prediction is only 1 bit. In addition, the fanfare command includes information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, and is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. At the end of the jackpot, The information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 is also only 1 bit. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, the amount of data processed in the MPUs 201 and 221 is almost the same as that in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the control burden on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 is small, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be suitably handled.

  Further, as described above, even if the prediction result that is treated as unreliable in the conventional pachinko machine may be treated as reliable in the pachinko machine 10, in this embodiment, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is used. It can be suitably handled. Therefore, the frequency that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be used is higher than that of the conventional pachinko machine, and the opportunity for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately handle the prediction result of the big win lottery without causing a problem such as an increase in processing time and a control burden and a problem such as an increase in unnecessary processing and a control burden. In addition, opportunities for improving the interest of the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new start winning. , CS1 and the gaming state flag 203a (that is, the winning gaming state flag) are acquired. Then, when the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110, the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the variation pattern prior to the big hit lottery based on the acquired data The type is prefetched in main controller 110.

  Then, when pre-reading is performed in main controller 110, if the data to be pre-read is acquired with a start-up winning other than the big hit, the winning game state flag in the data is displayed. Based on this, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching are determined. On the other hand, if the data to be prefetched is acquired with a big win starting prize, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for prefetching are determined based on the post-hit gaming state flag 203d. . When the winning game state flag or the after-hit gaming state flag 203d is off (indicating a low probability state), the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1 is selected, and the winning gaming state flag or the after-hit game When the gaming state flag 203d is on (indicating a high probability state), the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is selected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, the big win lottery is not performed, but the gaming state is in a low probability state. For this reason, the game state flag 203a is off during the jackpot, and when the data to be prefetched is acquired along with the start win during the jackpot, the game state flag at the time of winning in the data is always off. . Therefore, when the tables 202a1 and 202a2 are determined based on the winning game state flag in the data, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 is always selected. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is less likely to match the actual lottery result, and the accuracy of the prediction of the lottery result is deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the data to be prefetched is acquired in association with the start winning with a big hit, the jackpot random number table 202a1, used for prefetching based on the post-hit gaming state flag 203d. 202a2 is determined. Thereby, the precision of prediction of a lottery result can be improved.

  That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot. Therefore, the game state at the end of the jackpot cannot be discriminated until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, but if the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot, the game state at the end of the jackpot has already been determined. The control device 110 can determine the gaming state at the end of the jackpot. Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot ends, if there is a jackpot lottery pending in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery that was on hold is one game state set at the time of the jackpot end. It is executed in the main controller 110 one by one.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery held during the jackpot is also likely to be performed in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, if there is a start win during the jackpot and the look-ahead for the start win is made, it is more likely that the prediction precondition is the gaming state at the end of the jackpot than the prediction precondition is always in a low probability state. The possibility that the prediction result of the lottery and the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result match in the main controller 110 can be improved. Therefore, since the number of prediction results that can be handled as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 can be increased, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably used in this embodiment.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, a stop symbol indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot, In the third symbol display device 81, a jackpot effect is started. When the jackpot effect ends, the third symbol display device 81 performs an ending effect that is a part of the jackpot effect.

  In this ending effect, when a big hit lottery is performed based on the start winning prize being held at the end of the big win, is the player notified that the lottery result will be a big win in any of the big win lotteries? A confirmed effect display is performed), or the player is simply notified that the jackpot is over (normal display is performed). In the ending effect, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether “determined effect display” or “normal display” is performed.

  Specifically, immediately before the ending effect is started, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33), and the contents of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the ending mode counter Based on the value of 223f or the like, it is determined whether the display mode of the ending effect is “determined effect display” or “normal display”. The pre-read information storage area 223a is provided with one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Prefetch information corresponding to the winning is stored.

  When the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed in the sound lamp control device 113, the reserved areas are stored in the reserved areas in order from the reserved area with the smallest area number among the reserved areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a. The pre-read information is acquired one by one, and the prediction precondition in the pre-read information is compared with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after-game state flag 223c (see S1401 to S1410).

  In the process of S1406, if it is determined that the prediction precondition in the prefetch information matches the gaming state indicated by the big jackpot gaming state flag 223c, as described above, the lottery result of the big jackpot lottery is prefetched. This is a case where the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main control device 110, so the sound lamp control device 113 displays the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information. Can be treated as trustworthy. Therefore, in this case, in the processing of S1407, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot.

  Then, in the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the prediction result of the big hit lottery is out, another prefetch information stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is confirmed. Specifically, each process of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot, the process proceeds to the process of S1411 without confirming the remaining prefetch information stored in the holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Processing for determining whether or not to set the display mode of the ending effect to “determined effect display” is executed. That is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, and if the prediction result is a jackpot, the process does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining prefetch information is not confirmed.

  As described above, this is because the “confirmed effect display” informs the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the big hit lottery that is being held together with the end of the big win. This is because, as long as at least one jackpot lottery is selected, the lottery result of the other jackpot lottery may be any, and it is not necessary to check the pre-read information corresponding to the remaining jackpot lottery. Thus, in this embodiment, when confirmation of prefetch information is unnecessary, since the confirmation is not performed, execution of an unnecessary process can be suppressed.

  Further, the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and in the process of S1406, it is determined that the prediction precondition in the prefetch information does not match the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c. In this case, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching are provided. This is a case where the main controller 110 does not agree. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main controller 110. In this case, the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment Even in 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result is refrained.

  However, as described above, there is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information can be handled as credible. Determined. In the processing of S1408, if it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the prediction result can be trusted and regarded as a failure, so the processing returns to S1409, and the processing of S1404 to S1410 is repeated. Let it run.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated. A hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the processing of S1406, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the big jackpot gaming state flag 223c, and the big hit random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the prefetching of the big hit lottery result Even if the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetching do not match in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetching information is a jackpot in the processing of S1408. If so, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is lost. In other words, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result are not determined whether or not they match in the main controller 110, and the exception is uniquely determined to be out. In particular, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the jackpot lottery prediction result as reliable.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in the processing of S1408, the prediction result can be regarded as a failure, so the processing returns to S1409, and each processing of S1404 to S1410 is repeatedly executed. can do. Thus, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the game state indicated by the post-hit game state flag 223c, and the prediction result of the big win lottery in the prefetch information is missed in the process of S1408. If so, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  And according to the ending effect determination process (refer FIG. 33) mentioned above, when each process of S1404-S1410 is performed, in the process of S1406, the game state which shows the prediction precondition in prefetch information, and jackpot If the game state indicated by the game state flag 223c is different (S1406: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out (S1408: No), S1404 to S1410. The repetition of each process can be stopped there. That is, if it is unclear whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual lottery result corresponding to the prediction result, and the prediction result cannot be trusted, the process does not return to each processing of S1404 to S1410, and the remaining Do not check for prefetch information. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information cannot be trusted, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  In the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33), when it is unclear whether the actual lottery result of the big jackpot lottery will be a big hit or missed, the normal display is set as the display mode of the ending effect. It is constituted so that. As a result, even though the “determination effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and all the jackpot lotteries that were held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed. In fact, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit.

  In addition, the above-described ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed when an ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113. When it is time to start, it is transmitted from the main controller 110. Therefore, the ending effect determination process is not executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, but is executed after waiting immediately before the start of the ending effect. As described above, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the big hit, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes the maximum (four times), so it is executed at the timing when the big hit ends. If the pre-reading information is acquired from the pre-reading information storage area 223a after waiting until immediately before the start of the ending effect, four pieces of pre-reading information can be acquired in most cases.

  Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, compared to the case where the ending effect determination process is executed immediately after the jackpot effect is started, there is a higher possibility that a lot of pre-read information can be acquired. Can increase the possibility of being. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of “definite effect display” in the ending effect, so if any of the pending jackpot lotteries is made after the jackpot ends, the lottery result will be a jackpot This will increase opportunities for players to have a sense of expectation of becoming. In addition, every time a jackpot lottery is held, the chances of making the player feel awkward can be increased, and the opportunity for the player to increase the expectation that the next will be a big hit can also be increased. Can be increased.

  The above is the description of the first embodiment. As described above, in the first embodiment, as an example in which the sound lamp control device 113 can appropriately handle the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, in the ending effect determination process (see FIG. 33) executed during the jackpot, The example in which the prediction result of the lottery is handled appropriately to determine whether the display mode of the ending effect is “determined effect display” or “normal display” has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the determination of the display mode of the ending effect, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled as long as the process handles the prediction result of the jackpot lottery. For example, as one of the processes for handling the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, there is a process related to the continuous notice effect. The present invention can also be applied to processing related to the continuous notice effect, and naturally, the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be suitably handled.

  Next, as a second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to processing related to a continuous notice effect will be described. In the second embodiment, only parts different from the first embodiment will be described.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, in addition to the counters 223b and 223f to 223h and the flags 223c to 223e and 223i, a pre-read information storage area in which a part of the configuration is added as compared with the first embodiment. 223a, a newly added gaming state flag 223j, and a newly added performance execution gaming state flag 223k.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment.

  The difference between the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment and the prefetch information storage area 223a (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is that each of the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area is continuous as described later. The difference is whether or not there is a notice execution status area 223a4. As in the first embodiment, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment also has various types of information (prefetching preconditions for prefetching, prediction results of jackpot lottery, fluctuations) notified from the main control device 110 by the prefetching command. This is an area for storing pattern type prediction results).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the prefetch information storage area 223a in the second embodiment is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), as in the first embodiment. Each of these areas has at least a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area 223a1, a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223a2, and a prediction precondition storage area 223a3.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, a continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is provided in each of the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area. The continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 is an area for storing the continuous advance notice execution status, and the continuous advance notice execution status corresponds to each area (execution area to hold fourth area) in which the status is stored. This indicates whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed in the change effect when the change effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, 13 types of continuous notice execution statuses are provided, and a different status value is assigned to each status. Although details will be described later, there are six types of status indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect, and six types of status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but has been canceled. In the variation effect, 13 types of statuses, ie, one status indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed in the first place, are provided.

  Regarding the status indicating that the continuous notice effect is performed in the variable effect, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect among the probable jackpot, the normal jackpot, and the outage, and the prediction that triggered the continuous notice effect Status values of “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” are assigned so that it can be determined whether or not the result is a result. Note that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is the type of the prediction result used for the determination when it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect.

  The status value “1” indicates that although the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a probable big hit, the prediction result is not the chance of the continuous notice effect. Similarly, the status value “2” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a normal jackpot, and the status value “3” indicates that the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect. Although it indicates that it is out of place, each prediction result indicates that it is not an opportunity for continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, the status value “11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a probable big hit, and that the result of the prediction is a chance of the continuous notice effect. Similarly, the status value “12” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a normal jackpot, and the status value “13” represents the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect. The type indicates that it is out, and further, each prediction result indicates the trigger for the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, for the status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect, but the status indicating that it was canceled, the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect among the probable jackpot, the normal jackpot, and the outage In addition, status values of “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12, −13” are assigned so that it is possible to determine whether or not the prediction result is a trigger for the continuous notice effect.

  In this embodiment, as status values, positive status values “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” and negative status values “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12” are used. , −13 ”, but the status values may be distinguished by other methods. For example, if the status value is managed by 1 byte or 2 bytes, the most significant bit may be changed to 0 or 1 to distinguish the status value. Specifically, when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates the above-described positive status value, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates the above-described negative status value. Note that other bits may be changed instead of the most significant bit. Further, the status value may be only one of a positive status value and a negative status value, and each status value may be assigned to distinguish the status values so that each status value is different.

  The status value “−1” indicates that although the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect was a probable big hit, the prediction result was not the chance of the continuous notice effect. Similarly, the status value “−2” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a normal jackpot, and the status value “−3” indicates the prediction that triggered the continuous notice effect. Although the result indicates that the result was a failure, each prediction result indicates that it was not the trigger for the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, the status value “−11” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect was a probable big hit and that the prediction result was the chance of the continuous notice effect. Similarly, the status value “−12” indicates that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a normal jackpot, and the status value “−13” triggers the continuous notice effect. It shows that the type of the prediction result is out of place, and further shows that each prediction result is an opportunity for the continuous notice effect. A status value “0” is assigned to the status indicating that the continuous notice effect is not executed in the first place in the variable effect.

  Any one of these 13 types of status values is stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4. As described in the first embodiment, each of the five areas from the execution area to the reserved fourth area in the prefetch information storage area 223a is the RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Initialization is performed, and the five areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a are cleared to zero. That is, the status value of the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is set to “0” when the power is turned on.

  The status value in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 is determined when the pre-read command is received by the audio lamp control device 113 and the continuous notice effect is determined to be executed based on the pre-read information extracted from the pre-read command. Be changed. As described above, the pre-read command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, and various types of information (pre-prediction prediction precondition, jackpot lottery prediction result, variation pattern type prediction result) are extracted as pre-read information from the pre-read command. The prefetch information is newly stored in the hold area (any one of the hold first area to the hold fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  Then, a continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) described later is executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the pre-read information newly stored in the holding area. Here, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 in the holding area in which the prefetch information is newly stored is indicated to execute the continuous notice effect in the variable effect, and the new One status value (any one of 11, 12, 13) indicating that the prediction result of the pre-reading information is the trigger for the continuous notice effect is set according to the type of the prediction result that is the trigger for the continuous notice effect. Is done.

  For example, if the prediction result of new look-ahead information is a probable jackpot, if it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the probable jackpot becomes the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect. A status value “11” is set in the status storage area 223a4.

  Further, for all the reserved areas having an area number smaller than the reserved area in which the prefetch information is newly stored, that is, all the hold areas in which the prefetch information has already been stored, the status information in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 is displayed. Value is set. Here, although the status value to be set indicates that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect, the pre-read information in the holding area where the status value is set is not an opportunity for the continuous notice effect. One value (one of 1, 2, 3) is set according to the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect.

  For example, when the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a probable big hit, the status value “1” is stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 for all the reserved areas in which the prefetch information is already stored. Is set.

  Then, the continuous notice status stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the holding area is stored in the execution area and referred to by the MPU 221 when the variation effect corresponding to the holding area is started. As will be described in detail later, when the variation effect is started, if the continuous notice execution status of the execution area is any one of “1, 2, 3”, the continuous notification is performed in the variation effect to be started. If an effect is performed and the status value is “0”, “11, 12, 13” or “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12, −13”, the variable effect to be started In, the notice effect is not performed, and the normal variation effect is performed.

  Further, although details will be described later, it is determined that the prediction result of the prefetch information stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a cannot be trusted when the variable production scheduled to execute the continuous notice production is started. Then, in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area, a status value indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed but was canceled is set. Specifically, a negative sign is added to the positive status value stored in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 and set to a negative number.

  For example, when the variation effect is started, it is determined that the status value in the continuous notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area is “1” and the prediction result of the prefetch information stored in the execution area cannot be trusted. Then, the status value “−1” is set in the continuous advance notice execution status storage area 223a4 of the execution area. As a result, even if the fluctuating effect scheduled to execute the continuous notice effect is executed, the continuous notice effect is not performed, and the normal fluctuating effect is performed.

  In this embodiment, in order to show the continuous notice execution status in an easy-to-understand manner in the drawings to be referred to (FIGS. 62, 64, 66, and 68), the presence / absence of a flag, the shape of the flag, Indicates whether the flag is standing or falling down. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, the flag is not described, and when the status value is a positive number, the flag is raised, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is tilted. When the status value is “1”, it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, if the status value is “11”, it is a triangular black flag, if the status value is “2”, it is a square white flag, and if the status value is “12”, it is a square black flag. The value “3” is a white flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, and the status value “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square. Show.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The gaming state flag 223j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state or a high probability state (probability changing), similarly to the gaming state flag 203a of the main controller 110. When the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. When the gaming state flag 223j is on, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Indicates.

  This game state flag 223j is set to OFF in the RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. When the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10 and the jackpot ends (that is, when the ending effect ends), the jackpot type is set according to the jackpot type. Specifically, if the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state flag 223j is set to ON. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state flag 223j is set off.

  The gaming state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is set to off before the jackpot start, and is set to on or off according to the jackpot type after the jackpot ends. 223j is set to ON or OFF only after the jackpot. This is because the sound lamp control device 113 does not need to set the game state flag 223j during the jackpot because it does not refer to it. Note that the gaming state flag 223j may also be set to off before the jackpot start, similarly to the gaming state flag 203a.

  The game state flag 223j is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable or unreliable. When the gaming state flag 223j is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. Therefore, if the main control device 110 performs a big win lottery when the flag 223j is off, This means that the jackpot lottery is performed by referring to the low probability jackpot random number table 202a1 at 110. On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2.

  And as mentioned above, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the big hit lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the prefetch information corresponding to the big hit lottery performed in the main control device 110 is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113. The

  In addition, as described above, in each of the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area), the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type are included. In addition, a pre-reading prediction precondition is also stored. Therefore, by referring to the data stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the execution area or the holding area, which of the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern type stored in the same area It is possible to determine whether or not the data is prefetched with such a prediction precondition. That is, it is possible to determine which of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is used by the look-ahead performed in the main controller 110.

  Therefore, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the game state flag 223j is compared with the prediction precondition stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and used in this big hit lottery. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 to be executed match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 used in the prefetching of the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110.

  If the tables 202a1 and 202a2 match as a result of the comparison, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery match in the main controller 110. The device 113 determines that the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. On the other hand, if the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 do not match, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main controller 110. In 113, it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is not reliable.

  The effect state game state flag 223k indicates whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state or a high probability state ( It is a flag indicating whether or not certain change is in progress.

  If the effect execution game state flag 223k is off, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state when one target variation effect is executed. As described above, since the variation effect is executed in conjunction with the big hit lottery in the main control device 110, the big hit lottery is always performed before the variable effect. Therefore, if the game execution state flag 223k at the time of production execution is OFF, when one target variation production is executed, the main control device 110 refers to the low probability big hit random number table 202a1, and the big hit lottery is performed. Means to be done.

  On the other hand, if the effect execution game state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state when one target variation effect is executed. That is, when the performance state game state flag 223k is on, when one target variation effect is executed, the main controller 110 refers to the high probability big hit random number table 202a2, and the big hit lottery is performed. Means to be done.

  The effect execution game state flag 223k is set to OFF in the RAM initial value setting process (see S1010 in FIG. 28) executed when the power is turned on. Although details will be described later, the gaming status flag 223j is compared with the prediction preconditions stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 actually used in the jackpot lottery are compared. When the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202 used in the look-ahead of the lottery lottery result coincide with each other in the main controller 110 and it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area can be trusted On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area. .

  Specifically, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, the state of the after-hit game state flag 223c is set. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery is out, the state of the gaming state flag 223j described above is set. In the case of setting the performance state gaming state flag 223k during the jackpot, the state of the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c is set without checking the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area. Also good.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. In other words, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is a jackpot, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 changes according to the jackpot type, the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution displays the game after the jackpot The state of the state flag 223c is set, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot is set. Thereby, the game execution state flag 223k can be set to indicate the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big hit lottery.

  On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is out of place and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change, the state of the gaming state flag 223j is set in the effect execution state gaming state flag 223k. Thus, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set. Thereby, the game execution state flag 223k can be set to indicate the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big hit lottery. As described above, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (that is, when the next variation effect is executed) is set in the effect execution game state flag 223k. The

  The effect execution game state flag 223k is used by the MPU 221 to determine whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in the holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable or unreliable. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the effect execution gaming state flag 223k is set based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area, next, the effect execution gaming state flag 223k. Are compared with the prediction preconditions stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, and it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved first area can be trusted.

  Here, as described above, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 when the next big hit lottery is performed by the main controller 110 is set in the effect execution game state flag 223k. Therefore, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead of the lottery result of the big hit lottery by comparing the effect state game state flag 223k and the prediction precondition stored in the holding first area, The sound lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not the main jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prefetch match in the main controller 110.

  If the respective tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual lottery lottery result corresponding to the prediction result in the main controller 110, so the sound lamp control The device 113 can determine that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted.

  Here, when it is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the game execution state flag 223k is set at the stage of execution, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is further displayed. While it is determined that it can be trusted, the comparison is repeated in the order of the reserved second area, the reserved third area, and the reserved fourth area. In the present embodiment, among the four reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a, the data corresponding to the start winning that is older in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, Data corresponding to the oldest start winning in terms of time is stored in the reserved first area. For this reason, in order from the first holding area to the fourth holding area, the main control is performed by determining the game execution state flag 223k during the execution while determining the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the holding area. In the order in which the jackpot lottery is performed in the device 110, it can be determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is reliable.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 68, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. In addition, about the step which performs the process same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing main processing in the second embodiment. In the main process, when the process of S1111 is executed and the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501). In the process of S3501, if it is the end timing of the ending effect (S3501: Yes), the state of the big hit after game state flag 223c is set in the game state flag 223j of the RAM 223 (S3502).

  Specifically, if the game state flag 223c after the jackpot is off and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state when the jackpot ends, the game state flag 223j is also set to off. On the other hand, if the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is on and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state when the big winning is finished, the gaming state flag 223j is also turned on. If it is not the end timing of the ending effect in the process of S3501 (S3501: No), the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1112.

  In the processing of S1101, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the previous processing of S1101 was executed (S1101: Yes), S1102 to S1111. , And the process of S3501 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101: No), S1102 to S1111 and S3501. The process proceeds to S1112 without performing the process.

  According to the main process shown in FIG. 58, when the ending effect ends (that is, when the jackpot ends), the gaming state flag 223j indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot is displayed. You can set the state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the continuous notice determination process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing continuous notice determination processing (S1211) in the second embodiment. The continuous notice determination process (S1211) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1211 in FIG. 31), and is read ahead as in the first embodiment. When the command is received, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the continuous notice determination process, in the process of S1302, in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, when the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “big win” (S1302: Yes), the process proceeds to S1312. . On the other hand, in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1301, when the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “miss” (S1302: No), the prediction result of the variation pattern type read out in the process of S1301 is “Super”. It is determined whether it is “reach” (S3601).

  In the process of S3601, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is “super reach” (S3601: Yes), the process proceeds to S1313. On the other hand, when the prediction result of the variation pattern type is not “super reach” but other variation pattern types (S3601: No), this processing is terminated.

  Also, in the process of S1316, if it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1316: No), the process after S3602 is skipped, The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process. That is, the continuous notice effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1316, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223g is included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is started (S1316: Yes), among the pre-read information read in the process of S1301, It is determined what is the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (S3602). When the success / failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “probable change jackpot” (S3602: probability change jackpot), the prediction of the jackpot lottery among the reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a The continuous notice execution status is set to “1” for all reserved areas in which results are stored (S3603). That is, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a probable big hit is set.

  Also, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “ordinary jackpot” (S3602: normal jackpot), the jackpot lottery among the reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous notice execution status of all the reserved areas in which the prediction result is stored is set to “2” (S3604). That is, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that has triggered the continuous notice effect is usually a big hit is set.

  Also, when the success or failure in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is “miss” (S3602: miss), the prediction of the jackpot lottery among the reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The continuous notice execution status is set to “3” for all reserved areas in which results are stored (S3605). That is, a status value indicating that the type of the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is out of place is set.

Next, among the reserved areas of the pre-read information storage area 223a, the last notice of the pre-read information (that is, the prediction result of the big hit lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the precondition of the pre-reading prediction) is stored. “10” is added to the execution status (S3606).
In the present embodiment, based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area in which the prefetch information is stored lastly, it is determined whether to start the continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable effects, and the continuous notice effect If it is determined to start, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved area in which the prefetch information is stored last becomes the trigger. Therefore, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be started, if “10” is added to the continuous notice execution status of the reserved area in which the prefetch information is stored lastly, the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is stored. For the reserved area, the continuous notice status can be set to any one of “11, 12, 13”. Therefore, when referring to the continuous notice status of each holding area, based on the status value, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery of that holding area is the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect or different it can.

  According to the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 59 described above, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be started, the big hit lottery among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Can be set to a status value “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the variable effect.

  In addition, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be started, the status value is increased by “10” for the holding area in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery that is the trigger of the determination is stored, and the continuous notice status is It can be set to any one of “11, 12, 13”. Therefore, when referring to the continuous notice status of each holding area, based on the status value, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in that holding area is the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect or different it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the variable display setting process (S1112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1112) in the second embodiment.

  This variable display setting process (S1112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. Further, in order to execute the continuous notice effect in the variable effect, a display stop type command is set based on the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a.

  In the variable display setting process, after the process of S1506 is executed and the prefetch information (data) stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a is shifted, the prefetch information of the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a by the process of S1506 is next. The reserved area that has become empty due to the shift is cleared (S3701). Then, the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is acquired (S3702), and the obtained continuous notice execution status indicates that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect. It is determined whether it is “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” (S3703).

  In the process of S3703, when the acquired continuous notice execution status is the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3703: Yes), continuous. The notice execution status confirmation process A is executed (S3702). Although details will be described later, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a when the continuous notice effect is set to be executed in the variable effect. The prediction precondition and the gaming state flag 223j are compared to determine whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area is reliable. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect.

  In the process of S3703, when the acquired continuous notice execution status is other than the status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3703: No). , S3704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1507. Then, the process of S1509 is executed, and when the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 in the process of S1206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), then the prefetch information storage area 223a is acquired. The continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area is acquired (S3705).

  Then, it is determined whether the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3706). In the process of S3706, when the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the change effect (S3706: Yes), the change effect is displayed. A chance item is set as the stop type (S3707), and the process proceeds to S1514.

  By the processing of S3707, the change effect stop type in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, and the chance (the symbol on the middle line L2 is left The symbols are set to “3”, “4”, “1”) in order from the symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol used as the chance chance can be displayed as the continuous notice effect when the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3706, when the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is other than the status “1, 2, 3” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect (S3706: No), The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3708), and the process proceeds to S1514.

  By the processing of S3708, the continuous notice execution status acquired in the process of S3705 is the status “11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the variation effect, and the last time the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In the case of the fluctuating effect, no chance is set as the stop type. In addition, the status “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12, −13” indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect, but continuously in the variable effect. Similarly, in the case of the status “0” indicating that the notice effect is not executed, the stop type notified from the main control device 110 is set.

  According to the variation display setting process shown in FIG. 60, when the stop type of the current variation effect is set, the stop type is based on the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The stop type instructed by the main controller 110 can be set as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A (S3704) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (S3704).

  This continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process A (S3704) is executed in the change display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is newly changed in the third symbol display device 113. When the effect is started, if it is set to execute the continuous notice effect in the change effect, it is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a is reliable. Set to cancel.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, first, the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S3801). Then, the prediction precondition acquired in the process of S3801 is compared with the game state flag 223j (S3802). Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is prefetched in the main control device 110, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the information indicating the preconditions for the prefetching is controlled by the prefetch command. The device 110 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. If the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, it means that the main controller 110 uses the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 for prefetching, and the prediction precondition is in a high probability state. Means that prefetching has been performed using the high-probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, by referring to the prediction precondition in the prefetch information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is obtained by using which table 202a1, 202a2 in the main control device 110. Can be determined.

  Further, as described above, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the big hit lottery is performed based on the data stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to each other is stored in each area of the reserved ball storage area 203b in the main control device 110 and each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the big hit lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the prefetch information corresponding to the big hit lottery performed in the main control device 110 is stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a in the audio lamp control device 113. The Therefore, by referring to the prediction precondition of the prefetch information stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, which jackpot random number table is used in the prefetch made corresponding to the jackpot lottery performed in the main controller 110. It can be determined whether the prediction result is obtained by using 202a1 and 202a2.

  Further, as described above, the gaming state flag 223j is a flag indicating whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state or a high probability state (during probability change), and the gaming state flag 223j is off. This indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state. Therefore, if the main control device 110 performs the big hit lottery, it means that the main control device 110 refers to the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 and performs the big hit lottery. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223j is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state. Therefore, if the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, the main control device 110 uses a high probability time. This means that the jackpot lottery is performed with reference to the jackpot random number table 202a2. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery performed by the main control device 110 based on the state of the game state flag 223j.

  Therefore, in the process of S3803 described above, the jackpot random number used in the prefetching corresponding to the current big hit lottery is performed by comparing the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information with the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j. It can be compared whether the tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery match in the main controller 110.

  In the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), the current big hit lottery is selected. This is a case where the main controller 110 matches the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the corresponding prefetch and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, since the values of the first random number counter C1 to be compared are the same in the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison, the respective comparison results match, and the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the current The lottery result of the big hit lottery coincides with the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the jackpot lottery as reliable.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, when the prediction precondition in the prefetch information indicates a game state different from the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j (S3803: No), it is used in the prefetch corresponding to the current big hit lottery. This is a case where the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current big hit lottery do not match in the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, there is a possibility that the respective comparison results do not match, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result Is unclear in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the lottery result of the jackpot lottery.

  In the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate the same gaming state (S3803: Yes), as described above, This is a prediction result obtained by the processing, and is a case where the prediction result of the big hit lottery performed this time in the main control device 110 and the lottery result of the current big hit lottery match in the main control device 110. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, so that the current setting is maintained and the present process is terminated so that the continuous notice effect is executed in the current variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j indicate different gaming states (S3803: No), as described above, this time This is a case where the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main control device 110. In this case, even in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery The prediction result of the lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result will be refrained.

  However, as described in the first embodiment, since the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery may be handled as an exceptionally reliable one, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is It is determined whether it is a big hit (S3804).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. As such, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the current jackpot lottery Even if the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above are not matched in the main controller 110, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, the lottery result will be out of the present jackpot lottery. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are not determined whether they match in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be off. In the lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in this embodiment, the numerical value that is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value that is a win value or an outlier in the other table 202a1, 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, even if the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big-random number table 202a1, and it is determined that the result is out, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a jackpot or not in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the jackpot lottery prediction result as unreliable.

  In the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally wrong. In this case, the current setting is maintained so that the continuous notice effect is executed in the current variation effect, and the present process is terminated.

  Thus, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately. In that case, since the setting is maintained so that the continuous notice effect is executed in the current fluctuating effect, the opportunity for executing the continuous notice effect can be increased.

  Further, in the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out of place (S3804: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state flag 223j This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is different from the gaming state shown. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not.

  Therefore, in this case, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect as the continuous notice execution status. However, the status changes to indicate that it has been canceled. As a result, in the above-described change display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the change effect to be executed this time is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Execution can be canceled.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A shown in FIG. 61 described above, in the process of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is compared with the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j. The main control device 110 can compare whether the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the jackpot lottery match with the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not memorized in the first place, the pachinko machine from the time when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big win lottery to the time when the actual big win lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. When ten game states change, it becomes unclear in which game state prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the main hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current big hit lottery match with the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current big hit lottery in the main controller 110. Become. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main controller 110. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The lottery prediction results were treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223j are stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the prefetch corresponding to the current jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, whether or not the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current big hit lottery match the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current big hit lottery in the main controller 110 or not, Even in the case where it is unclear if it is a pachinko machine, this embodiment can make this determination.

  When the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same, so that each comparison result And the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the current jackpot lottery prediction result as reliable. In this way, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as reliable. In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, the prefetching corresponding to the current big hit lottery was used. This is a case where the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current big hit lottery do not match in the main controller 110. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main control device 110. In this case, even in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery The prediction result of the lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result will be refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Accordingly, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the current jackpot lottery Even if the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in this jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the jackpot lottery prediction result in the prefetch information is a jackpot in the process of S3804, In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is lost. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are not unclear whether they match in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be off. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information may be out of the process in S3804. For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown.

  In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the current jackpot If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent big hit lottery.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed to a variable effect. However, the status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect has been canceled. As a result, when the above-described change display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the change effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No, and the continuous change effect at this time is continuous. The execution of the notice effect can be canceled.

  In other words, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be stopped for the variable change executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states. (S3803: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3804, and it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted As an alternative, the process may proceed to S3805 without performing S3804.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is executed when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113 and a variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. Is done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is performed at the end of the changing effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is performed immediately after the changing effect is started and immediately before the changing effect is ended. Can be executed at any time.

  In this embodiment, the effect of displaying a “chance eye” at the end of the variation effect is a continuous notice effect. However, during the variation effect, a different image or a different sound is displayed. An effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect may be performed during the variation effect, or may be performed during the variation effect and at the end of the variation. Then, when the continuous notice effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  Next, an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In FIG. 62, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the start winning that has been put on hold, and two start winnings are provided separately from the start winning. Indicates a held state. Moreover, in each variation effect of the variation effect newly performed and the variation effect corresponding to two pending start winnings, the state where the execution of the continuous notice effect is scheduled is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), the pre-read information is stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “1” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  Also, the pre-read information for the reserved first area is that the prediction result of jackpot lottery is usually a big jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is special reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “1” as the continuous notice execution status Is stored. Further, in the reserved second area, the prediction value of the jackpot lottery is a probable big hit, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is the special reach, the prediction precondition is in the low probability state, and the status value “11” as the continuous notice execution status. Is stored.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in order to show the continuous notice execution status in an easy-to-understand manner in the drawings (FIGS. 62, 64, 66, and 68), not the status value but the presence / absence of the flag, And indicate whether the flag is standing or falling down. Specifically, when the status value is “0”, the flag is not described, and when the status value is a positive number, the flag is raised, and when the status value is a negative number, the flag is tilted. When the status value is “1”, it is indicated by a triangular white flag. Similarly, if the status value is “11”, it is a triangular black flag, if the status value is “2”, it is a square white flag, and if the status value is “12”, it is a square black flag. The value “3” is a white flag with a V-shaped cut in the square, and the status value “13” is a black flag with a V-shaped cut in the square. Show.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-1), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction are made from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, and further, the acquired jackpot lottery result is out, so the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and It becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery coincides with the main controller 110. For this reason, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery, that is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery executed this time.

  In this case, the process proceeds to the processing of S3805, and a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area. As a result, the status value is changed to “−1”, and the continuous notice effect in the variable effect is obtained. Was changed to a status indicating that it was canceled. Then, the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process A ends.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is completed, in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the fluctuation effect executed this time is set, Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. Is done. As a result, in the current variation effect, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped and a normal stop display is performed.

  In this way, when the prediction result of the current big hit lottery cannot be trusted, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be stopped for the changing effect executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Then, when the current variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is executed, as described above, it is stored in each area (execution area, reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Shift processing for shifting the processed data to the execution area side is performed. Specifically, the look-ahead information in each area is shifted, such as hold first area → execution area, hold second area → hold first area, and the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-2) is obtained.

  Here, when the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) is executed, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction precondition are first obtained from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a as in the previous case. Acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, although the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, the acquired prediction result of the big hit lottery is usually a big hit. As described above, even if the acquired prediction precondition and the game state of the game state flag 223j are different, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is a jackpot, the lottery result in the actual jackpot lottery Will be missed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, the random value (the value of the counter C1), which is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, is off when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state. Similarly, the random value (the value of the counter C1) that is a big hit when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state is out of order when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state. Therefore, in this case, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the pre-reading information is not unknown, and is uniquely determined when the lottery result is lost. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can regard the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result as a failure.

  In this way, with the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of a pachinko machine, it is unknown whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result treated as unreliable However, since the sound lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment can be treated as reliable, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be preferably handled in the present embodiment.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the second continuous notice execution status confirmation process A ends. Then, after the second continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is completed, in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the fluctuation effect executed for the second time is set, the continuous notice is given. Since the status value of the execution status is “1”, the process branches to S3706: Yes, and “chance eye” is set as the variation effect stop type in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous notice effect is performed in the present variation effect, and “chance eyes” are displayed in the variation effect.

  Thus, with the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of a pachinko machine, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted and the continuous notice effect in the variable effect is stopped, the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment. In 113, the setting can be maintained to execute the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect can be executed. Therefore, the opportunity which can perform a continuous notice effect can be increased.

  Then, when the second variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is executed, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (execution area, reserved first area to reserved fourth area) as in the previous case. Shift processing for shifting the data stored in the storage area to the execution area side is performed, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 62 (b-3).

  Here, when the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) is executed, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction precondition are first obtained from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a as in the previous case. In the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223j match, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are displayed in the main controller 110. Match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery. In this case, the process proceeds to S3804: Yes, the current state is maintained, and the third continuous notice execution status confirmation process A ends.

  However, the continuous notice execution status indicates that the status value is “11” and the prediction result of the big hit lottery stored in the execution area is an opportunity for the continuous notice effect. That is, the third variation effect is the last variation effect for executing the continuous notice effect. Therefore, after the third continuous notice execution status confirmation process A is completed, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the change type stop type executed for the third time is set, S3706: No The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is. As a result, in the current variation effect, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped and a normal stop display is performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a trigger for the continuous notice effect, and the executed change effect is the last change effect for executing the continuous notice effect, the main control device The stop type instructed by the stop type command from 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, it is suggested to the player that the continuous notice effect ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process B, which is a modification of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is reliable. It is set so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped for the variable effect. On the other hand, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B, the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed over the various change effects from the change effect executed this time to the last change effect that was scheduled to be executed. Set to stop.

  The continuous notice execution status confirmation process B is executed in place of the above-described continuous notice execution status A. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, when a variation effect is newly started in the third symbol display device 113, continuous notification is made in the variation effect. If it is set to execute the production, it is executed.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B, the following process is executed instead of the process of S3805 described above. That is, in the pre-read information storage area 223a, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status of all areas (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery (ie, pre-read information) is stored. (S3901), each continuous notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled.

  As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), every time a variation type stop type scheduled to be executed is set, the process branches to S3706: No. The execution of the continuous notice effect can be canceled for all the changing effects scheduled to be executed.

  According to the continuous notice execution status B shown in FIG. 63 above, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and in the process of S3804, When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information is out of date and the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown, not only the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a A negative sign can also be attached to the continuous notice execution statuses of all the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) in which the prefetch information is stored.

  In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the current jackpot If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent big hit lottery. In other words, if it is unclear whether the current lottery lottery result will be a big hit or missed, the lottery results for the next jackpot lottery will also be unknown.

  Therefore, in each of the continuous notice execution statuses in each process B, not only the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a but also the continuous notice execution status stored in all the holding areas are changed. However, the status is changed to a status indicating that it has been cancelled. As a result, the above-described change display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed, and the change effect for which the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed can be branched to S3706: No each time the stop type is set. In addition, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be canceled in each variable effect that is scheduled to be executed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after this time is unknown, a continuous notice effect is performed on the dark clouds, and there is a problem that a continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process B, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states. (S3803: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3804, and it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted As an alternative, the process may proceed to S3901 without performing the process of S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process B, as in the case of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B between the start of the variation effect and immediately before the end of the variation effect. Can be executed at any time.

  In this embodiment, the effect of displaying a “chance eye” at the end of the variation effect is a continuous notice effect. However, during the variation effect, a different image or a different sound is displayed. An effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect may be performed during the variation effect, or may be performed during the variation effect and at the end of the variation. Then, when the continuous notice effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, continuous notice execution statuses stored in each area (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing B. An example of a flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B.

  In FIG. 64, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the start winning that has been put on hold, and two start winnings are provided separately from the start winning. Indicates a held state. Moreover, in each variation effect of the variation effect newly performed and the variation effect corresponding to two pending start winnings, the state where the execution of the continuous notice effect is scheduled is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is on, and as shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), the pre-read information is stored in the execution area of the pre-read information storage area 223a. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is lost, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, and the status value “1” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is off, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is long, the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, and the status value “1” as the continuous notice execution status as pre-read information in the hold first area. Is stored. Further, in the reserved second area, as the pre-reading information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a probable big hit, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “11” as the continuous notice execution status. Is stored.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation process B (see FIG. 63) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 64 (b-1), first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a The precondition is acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the gaming state flag 223j, and further, the acquired jackpot lottery result is out, so the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and It becomes unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery coincides with the main controller 110. For this reason, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery, that is, the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to the process of S3901, and, among the prefetch information storage area 223a, all areas (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) where the prediction result of the big hit lottery (that is, prefetch information) is stored are stored. ) Is given a minus sign to the continuous notice execution status. As a result, the status values of the execution area and the hold first area are both changed to “−1”, and the status value of the hold second area is changed to “−11”, and the continuous notice effect is executed in the variable effect. The status is changed to show that it was scheduled but canceled. Then, the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process B ends.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process B ends, in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, Since the status value is “−1”, the process branches to S3706: No, and the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. Is done. As a result, in the current variation effect, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped and a normal stop display is performed.

  In addition, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), both when the second variation effect is executed after the current variation effect is completed and when the third variation effect is executed. When the stop type of each variation effect is set, the status of the continuous notice execution status is “−11” and the process branches to S3706: No. Therefore, the stop instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 The type is set as it is as a stop type of variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is.

  As a result, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped and the normal stop display is performed over the respective change effects from the present change effect to the last change effect scheduled to be executed.

  In this way, if the prediction result of this jackpot lottery can not be trusted, continuous notice effects over the various change effects from the present change effect to the last change effect that was scheduled to be executed. Can be canceled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process C, which is a modification of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes A and B, only the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in that area is reliable. In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C, whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery stored in that area can be trusted not only for the execution area but also for all the holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Determine whether or not.

  Further, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C, if it is determined that the prediction result stored in any area is not reliable, the continuous notice effect is obtained from the variation effect corresponding to the prediction result determined to be untrustworthy. It is set so that the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped over each change effect until the last change effect that was scheduled to be executed.

  The continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is executed in place of the above-described continuous notice execution statuses A and B. That is, in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, when a variation effect is newly started in the third symbol display device 113, continuous notification is made in the variation effect. If it is set to execute the production, it is executed.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C, the processes of S3801 to S3803 are executed. In the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are the same. If it is shown (S3803: Yes), it is determined whether the prediction result of the big win lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a big hit (S4001).

  Here, when it is determined as S4001: Yes, the prediction precondition acquired in the process of S3801 matches the game state of the game state flag 223j, and the prediction of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S3801 Since the result matches the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted. Furthermore, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery acquired in the process of S3801 is a jackpot, after the current variation effect is finished, the jackpot is always the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result.

  As described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated according to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot. Set to Therefore, after the jackpot that is the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result is reached, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type that is the same as the jackpot indicated by the prediction result. Therefore, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be trusted, and when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined from the jackpot type indicated by the prediction result. it can.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot in the process of S4001 (S4001: Yes), the pachinko machine at the end of the jackpot is displayed in the effect state game state flag 223k of the RAM223. The gaming state set to 10 is set (S4002). Specifically, if the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a probable big hit, the effect state gaming state flag 223k is set to ON, and if the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit, the effect state game state flag 223k is set. Set to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Then, the process proceeds to S4004.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is out of place (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4003. In the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are different (S3803: No), the prefetching information storage area 223a It is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot (S3804).

  In the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is a jackpot (S3804: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally wrong. In this case, since it can be treated as reliable, the process proceeds to S4003. Thus, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  In the processing of S4003, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, that is, the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set in the effect execution gaming state flag 223k of the RAM 223 (S4003). Specifically, when the game state flag 223j is on, the effect execution game state flag 223k is also set to on, and when the game state flag 223j is off, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is also turned off. Set.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. In other words, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is off. Therefore, if the prediction result of the current big hit lottery is out of place, the big hit random number table 202a1, used in the next big hit lottery, is set by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution. 202a2 can be indicated by a game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution. Then, the process proceeds to S4004.

  In the process of S3804, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is out of place (S3804: No), the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game indicated by the game state flag 223j This is a case where the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is out of place. In this case, as described above, the prediction result corresponding to the current jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not. Therefore, in this case, the process of S3901 is executed and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states (S3803: No), The process proceeds to the process of S3804, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not trusted and the process of S3804 It may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing the above.

  In the process of S4004, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S4004), and it is determined whether the value (M) of the held ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005). . In the process of S4005, when the value (M) of the held ball number counter 223b is 0 (S4005: No), this process ends because no main winning lottery is held in the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if the value (M) of the held ball number counter 223b exceeds 0 (S4005: Yes), it means that one or more jackpot lotteries are held in the main controller 110. The prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery are checked one by one from the ones in the reserved order among the jackpot lotteries held. Specifically, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved area in order from the reserved area with the smallest area number among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Check one by one. In addition, the data corresponding to the time-old start winning is stored in the area with the smaller area number.

  First, 1 is set to the variable i (S4006), and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area of the prefetch information storage area 223a and the prediction precondition are acquired (S4007). Then, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the reserved i-th area is compared with the gaming state indicated by the effect execution gaming state flag 223k (S4008), and as a result of the comparison, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition It is determined whether the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution indicates the same game state (S4009).

  In this case, the state of the flag 223k is set so that the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution shows the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery by the process of S4002 or S4003 described above. Is set. Specifically, when the performance state gaming state flag 223k is off, the main control device 110 refers to the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 to indicate that the next big hit lottery will be performed. On the other hand, when the effect execution game state flag 223k is on, the main control device 110 refers to the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 to indicate that the next jackpot lottery will be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data corresponding to an earlier start winning is stored in an area having a smaller area number among the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Therefore, at this time, the prefetch information corresponding to the next jackpot lottery is stored in the holding first area.

  Therefore, in the process of S4007 described above, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is compared with the game state indicated by the effect execution game state flag 223k, and used in the prefetch corresponding to the next big hit lottery. It is possible to compare whether or not the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next big hit lottery match in the main controller 110.

  In the processing of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the next time This is a case where the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the big hit lottery match the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next big hit lottery in the main controller 110.

  Therefore, since the values of the first random number counter C1 to be compared are also the same in the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison, the respective comparison results match, the prediction result of the next big hit lottery and the next The lottery result of the big hit lottery coincides with the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery as being reliable.

  Therefore, in the process of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution gaming state flag 223k indicate the same gaming state (S4009: Yes), the big hit lottery Therefore, it is next determined whether or not the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4010).

  In the process of S4010, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4010: Yes), the game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution is set to the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot. The gaming state to be set is set (S4011). Specifically, if the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a probable big hit, the effect state gaming state flag 223k is set to ON, and if the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit, the effect state game state flag 223k is set. Set it to off. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Then, the process proceeds to S4014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4010, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the reserved i-th area is out (S4010: No), the process of S4011 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4014. As described above, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 does not change the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 while the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out, so that the big hit scheduled to be used in the big hit lottery The random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are not changed. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be off, maintaining the state of the game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery, It can be indicated by a game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution.

  In the case of S4010: No, the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, that is, the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 may be set in the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution. Specifically, when the game state flag 223j is on, the effect execution game state flag 223k is also set to on, and when the game state flag 223j is off, the effect execution time game state flag 223k is also turned off. Set.

  In the processing of S4009, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the gaming state indicated by the effect execution gaming state flag 223k indicate different gaming states (S4009: No), as described above. Furthermore, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next big hit lottery and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the next big hit lottery do not match in the main controller 110. .

  Therefore, since it is unclear whether the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery coincide with each other in the main controller 110, in this case, the sound lamp controller 113 of the present embodiment also wins the jackpot The prediction result of the lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result will be refrained.

  However, as described above, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be handled as an exceptionally reliable one, it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4012). As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the winning value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. As such, the hit value is set for each. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1, 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the next jackpot lottery and the next time Even if the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the predicted result of the next jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the lottery result is determined in the next jackpot lottery. It will be off. In other words, in this case, the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery are not unknown in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be out. In the lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the next jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  On the other hand, as described above, in this embodiment, the numerical value that is the winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 becomes an outlier in the other table 202a1 and 202a2, but the outlier in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2. It is unclear whether the numerical value that is a win value or an outlier in the other table 202a1, 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, even if the counter value C1 is compared with one of the big-random number table 202a1, and it is determined that the result is out, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, it is unclear whether the result is determined to be a jackpot or not in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 treats the jackpot lottery prediction result as unreliable.

  In the process of S4012, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot (S4012: Yes), as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is exceptionally wrong and can be trusted , The process proceeds to S4014. Thus, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In this embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately. In that case, as will be described later, it is possible to return to the processing of S4014 and continue to execute the repetitive processing of S4007 to S4015. By the processing of S4013 described later, the continuous notice effect can be canceled over each change effect from the change effect to the last change effect that was scheduled to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the process of S4014, 1 is added to the variable i (S4014), and it is determined whether the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015). In the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), the prefetch information is stored in other reserved areas in the prefetch information storage area 223a. If so, the process returns to S4007 to check the prefetch information stored in another reserved area. After returning to the processing of S4007, the processing of S4007 to S4015 described above is repeated, and the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) And the game state indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are performed in ascending order of area number.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4015, when the value of the variable i exceeds the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015: No), the prefetch information stored in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is stored. This is the case when all are confirmed. In this case, since there is no more pre-read information to be confirmed, this process is terminated.

  Further, in the process of S4012, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is out of place (S4012: No), the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the pre-read information and the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution are indicated. Unlike the gaming state, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is not suitable. In this case, as described above, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and it is unclear whether the lottery result of the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will be a jackpot or not.

  Therefore, in this case, the process does not return to the processes of S4007 to S4015, but proceeds to the process of S4013, and the reserved i-th of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in each reserved area from the area to the reserved Mth area (S4013), and this process is terminated.

  That is, in the process of S4013, the continuous notice execution status indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the changing effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the changing effect but is canceled. . As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), every time a variation effect stop type corresponding to pre-read information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Therefore, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be canceled over each variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area.

  In other words, when an unreliable thing is found in the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, from the variation effect corresponding to the prediction result to the last variation effect that was scheduled to execute the continuous notice effect, The continuous notice effect can be canceled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In addition, as described above, in the continuous recurring execution status confirmation process C, if it is unclear whether the actual lottery result of the big hit lottery will be a big hit or missed, the process does not return to the processes of S4007 to S4015 and remains The pre-reading information is not checked. This is because when one of the jackpot lotteries held in the main control unit 110 is checked in order of the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery from the earlier one in the order of being held, This is because if it becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results are also unknown.

  That is, in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, If the lottery result is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent big hit lottery.

  And since the prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is performed in the same manner as the jackpot lottery, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the prediction results of the remaining jackpot lotteries predicted after the prediction result are also unknown. . Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results are also unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. There is no point. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result in the prefetch information becomes unknown, the remaining prefetch information is not checked, so that unnecessary processing can be suppressed.

  According to the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C shown in FIG. 65 described above, in the process of S4008, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is compared with the game state indicated by the effect execution game state flag 223k. To compare whether the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next big hit lottery match with the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big hit lottery in the main controller 110. it can.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not memorized in the first place, the pachinko machine from the time when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big win lottery to the time when the actual big win lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. When ten game states change, it becomes unclear in which game state prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it becomes unclear whether main hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the current big hit lottery match with big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current big hit lottery in main controller 110.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent big hit lottery.

  Accordingly, if there is a possibility that the main jackpot lottery prediction result and the current jackpot lottery lottery result are different in the main controller 110, the next jackpot lottery prediction result and the subsequent jackpot lottery lottery Since there is a possibility that the result may differ, the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine has treated not only this time but also the prediction result of the big hit lottery after the next time as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k, so the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery from the next time onward is stored. 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the subsequent jackpot lottery can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control includes the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery after the next time. Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not they match in the device 110, this embodiment can make this determination.

  When the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the big hit lottery as being reliable. In this way, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as reliable. In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S4012, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the performance state gaming state flag 223k, the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery is performed. Is the case where the main controller 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery match in the main controller 110, in this case, the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment Even in 113, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the prediction result is not used.

  However, in the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the performance state gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery Even if 202a1, 202a2 and the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the look-ahead information is a jackpot in the process of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is lost. In other words, in this case, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery are not unknown whether they match in the main controller 110 and are uniquely determined to be off. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution game state flag 223k, and in the process of S4012, the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is If it is off, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the current jackpot If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery results of the subsequent jackpot lotteries are also unknown.

  Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results are also unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. There is no point. In this embodiment, when the prediction result in prefetch information becomes unknown, it branches to S4012: No and confirmation is not performed about the remaining prefetch information, Therefore Execution of an unnecessary process can be suppressed.

  Further, in such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C process, the continuous notice execution stored in the respective reserved areas from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is attached to the status, and the continuous notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the changing effect but was canceled.

  As a result, when the above-described change display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the change effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No, and the continuous change effect at this time is continuous. The execution of the notice effect can be canceled. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S3803, when the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j indicate different game states (S3803: No), The process proceeds to the process of S3804, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot. However, in the case of S3803: No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not trusted and the process of S3804 It may be configured to shift to the processing of S3901 without performing the above.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C described above, in the process of S4009, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state indicated by the effect execution game state flag 223k are different. In this case (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012, and it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, but in the case of S4009: No, the jackpot lottery It may be configured to shift to the process of S4013 without performing the process of S4012, assuming that the prediction result cannot be trusted.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is executed when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113 and a variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. Is done. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is performed at the end of the changing effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is performed immediately after the changing effect is started and immediately before the changing effect ends. Can be executed at any time.

  In this embodiment, the effect of displaying a “chance eye” at the end of the variation effect is a continuous notice effect. However, during the variation effect, a different image or a different sound is displayed. An effect of emitting sound may be used as a continuous notice effect. The continuous notice effect may be performed during the variation effect, or may be performed during the variation effect and at the end of the variation. Then, when the continuous notice effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  In addition, the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is executed when the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, but is executed during the jackpot instead of when the variation effect is started. You may comprise as follows. By configuring to be executed during the jackpot, the number of executions of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C, it is confirmed whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot by the process of S4010 among the repeated processes of S4007 to S4015. When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the i-th area is a jackpot, the prediction process result of the jackpot lottery may be regarded as unreliable and the process may be interrupted there.

  Here, referring to FIG. 66, the continuous notice execution status stored in each area (execution area, reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing C. An example of a flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C.

  In FIG. 66, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, a variable effect is newly executed based on the start winning that has been put on hold, and three start winnings are provided separately from the start winning. Indicates a held state. Moreover, in each variation effect of the variation effect newly performed and the variation effect corresponding to three pending start prizes, the state where the execution of the continuous notice effect is scheduled is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a includes prefetch information. The prediction result of the big hit lottery is off, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, and the status value “3” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, the pre-read information in the reserved first area includes a jackpot lottery prediction result that is a probable big hit, a prediction result of the variation pattern type is a super reach, a prediction precondition is a low probability state, and a status value “3” as a continuous notice execution status. Is stored. In addition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is lost as pre-read information in the reserved second area, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, and the status value “3” as the continuous notice execution status Is stored. In addition, in the reserved fourth area, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is lost as the pre-reading information, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is super reach, the prediction precondition is in a low probability state, and the status value “13” as the continuous notice execution status. Is stored.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C (see FIG. 65) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 66B, first, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction preconditions are executed from the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Are acquired, and in the process of S3802, the acquired prediction precondition is compared with the gaming state flag 223j.

  In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the game state flag 223j match, the acquired jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are displayed in the main controller 110. Match. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery. In this case, the process of S4001 is executed, and the process branches to S4001: No, and the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, that is, the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 is branched to the effect execution state game state flag 223k. Is set.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out. Therefore, by setting the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the performance state game state flag 223k, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big hit lottery are indicated by the production state game state flag 223k. Can do.

  Next, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. In the process of S4008, the acquired prediction precondition and the effect execution gaming state flag 223k are acquired. Are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the effect execution game state flag 223k match, the main jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are Match in device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery. In this case, the process branches to S4009: Yes, and the process of S4010 is executed to determine whether or not the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the big hit lottery is a probable big win, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and the game state at the time of the big hit end game state, that is, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the probable big hit is displayed. Is set. More specifically, the game execution state flag 223k is set to ON. Thereby, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery can be indicated by the game state flag 223k at the time of effect execution.

  Next, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. In the process of S4008, the acquired prediction precondition and the stage-specific gaming state flag 223k are acquired. Are compared. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution, and further, the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery is out of order. It becomes unclear whether the prediction result and the actual lottery lottery result match in main controller 110. For this reason, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S4013, and a negative sign is added to the continuous advance notice execution status stored in each hold area from the hold second area to the hold third area in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Then, the continuous notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the changing effect but was canceled. Specifically, the status value of the hold second area is changed to “−3” and the status value of the hold third area is changed to “−13”, and the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect, but is canceled. The status changes to indicate that Then, the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process C ends.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is completed, in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the stop type of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is set, the status of the continuous notice status Since the value is “3”, the process branches to S3706: Yes, and “chance eye” is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, a continuous notice effect is performed in the present variation effect, and “chance eyes” are displayed in the variation effect.

  Even when the stop type of the variation effect executed for the second time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “3”, so that the process branches to S3706: Yes, and the variation in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. “Chance eyes” is set as the stop type of the production. As a result, a continuous notice effect is performed in the present variation effect, and “chance eyes” are displayed in the variation effect.

  However, when the stop type of the variable effect to be executed for the third time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−3”, so that the process branches to S3706: No and stops from the main control device 110. The stop type instructed by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is. As a result, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped and the normal stop display is performed in the third variation effect.

  Further, when the stop type of the variable effect to be executed for the fourth time is set, the status value of the continuous notice status is “−13”, so that the process branches to S3706: No and stops from the main control device 110. The stop type instructed by the type command is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is. As a result, in the fourth variation effect, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped and the normal stop display is performed.

  In this way, when an untrustworthy result is found in the jackpot lottery prediction result, the variation effect from the variation effect corresponding to the prediction result to the last change effect scheduled to execute the continuous notice effect is covered. The continuous notice effect can be canceled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D which is a modification of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a continuous notice execution status confirmation process D, which is a modification of the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A.

  The above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, and C are executed when the variable effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, but the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D is performed as described above. This is executed when it is determined in the determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be executed.

  In the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process D, processing similar to the above-described continuous advance notice execution status confirmation process C is performed. The difference from the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C is that the steps S4004 and S4005 are not provided, and the steps S4101 to S4104 are added.

  In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D, it is first determined whether or not a big hit is currently made (S4101). If not a big hit (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S3801, and steps S3801 to 3804 are performed. Processing, processing in S3901, and processing in S4001 to S4003 are executed. Then, when the process of S4002 or the process of S4003 ends, the process proceeds to S4006.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if it is a big hit (S4101: Yes), the game state indicated by the post-hit game state flag 223c, that is, the pachinko machine at the time when the current big hit has ended, in the effect execution game state flag 223k. Ten game states are set (S4102). The process proceeds to S4006. In the processing of S4102, specifically, if the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is on, the effect execution game state flag 223k is also set to on, and if the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is off, the effect is executed. The game state flag 223k is also set to off.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot can be determined based on the after-hit gaming state flag 223c. Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the jackpot lottery newly executed in the main controller 110 after the end of the jackpot can be determined based on the state of the after jackpot game state flag 223c. Therefore, by setting the game state indicated by the after-hit game state flag 223c in the effect state game state flag 223k, the big-hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big-hit lottery are determined by the effect-time game state flag 223k. Can show.

  Then, the processing of S4006 to S4015 is executed, and in the processing of S4015, when the value of the variable i is equal to or less than the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 223b (S4015: Yes), or when the processing of S4013 is completed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103). In the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: Yes), the number of times the continuous notice effect is performed is set to execute the continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable effects. There are few, and the continuous notice production does not continue for a long time. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the continuous notice effect does not last for a long time, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped. Thereby, when the continuous notice effect is performed, since the continuous notice effect lasts for a long time, it is possible to make the player have a long sense of expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Specifically, in the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 2 or less (S4103: Yes), the correct one of the reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) in the prefetch information storage area 223a. Is added to all the continuous notice execution statuses that are the number of (S4104), and this processing is terminated. That is, in the process of S4104, the continuous notice execution status indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the changing effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the changing effect but is canceled. .

  As a result, in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 60), when the variation effect stop type corresponding to the prefetch information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area is set, the process branches to S3706: No. Therefore, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be canceled over each variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area. As a result, the continuous notice effect itself is canceled and the continuous notice effect is never executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, when the value of the variable i is 3 or more (S4103: No), the process of S4104 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  According to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process D shown in FIG. 67, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a It can be determined whether or not the pre-read information stored in the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) is reliable. And when unreliable information is found among the prefetch information, it is continuously changed over each variation production from the variation production corresponding to the prefetch information to the last variation production scheduled to execute the continuous notice production. The notice effect can be canceled.

  In addition, when the number of times of continuous notice effect is executed is 2 or less, it is set to execute the continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times that the continuous notice effect is performed is small. The continuous notice effect itself is canceled and the continuous notice effect is never executed. However, when the continuous notice effect is performed, since the continuous notice effect lasts for a long time, the player can have a long-awaited expectation that the game state is advantageous to the player. In the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D, if the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is 2 or less, the continuous notice effect itself is stopped, but the number is not limited to two and may be set arbitrarily. .

  In the present embodiment, when the above-described continuous advance execution status confirmation process D is determined to execute the continuous advance notice effect in the above-described continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 59), the above-described continuous advance execution status confirmation process described above. Similarly to A, B, and C, the third symbol display device 81 may execute the variation effect. Further, it may be executed at any time from the start of the variation effect until just before the end of the variation effect. Moreover, it may be performed during the variation effect, may be performed during the variation effect and at the end of the variation, or may be performed during the jackpot.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 68, continuous notice execution statuses stored in the respective areas (execution area, hold first area to hold fourth area) of prefetch information storage area 223a by continuous notice execution status confirmation processing D. An example of a flow in which is changed will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a flow in which the continuous notice execution status is changed by the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D.

  In FIG. 68, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable big hit, when the gaming state is a low probability state, a state where four start winnings are held is shown. In addition, for each variation effect corresponding to the four start winning prizes on hold, a state in which execution of the continuous notice effect is scheduled is shown.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the gaming state flag 223j of the RAM 233 is off, and the post-hit gaming state flag 223c is on. As shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a, as the prefetch information, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is the probable big hit, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is the special reach, and the prediction precondition Is stored in the low probability state and the status value “0” is stored as the continuous notice execution status.

  In addition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is lost as the pre-read information in the reserved first area, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “2” is the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, in the reserved second area, the prediction value of the jackpot lottery is usually a big jackpot, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is a super reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “2” is the continuous notice execution status. Is stored.

  In addition, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is excluded as the pre-read information in the reserved third area, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is normal reach, the prediction precondition is a high probability state, and the status value “2” is the continuous notice execution status. Data is stored. In addition, in the reserved fourth area, as the pre-reading information, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is usually the big hit, the prediction result of the variation pattern type is the special reach, the prediction precondition is the high probability state, and the status value “12” as the continuous notice execution status. Is stored.

  When the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67) is executed in the state shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), first, in the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made. Here, since the probability change big hit is being made, the process branches to S4101: Yes, and the state of the post-hit game state 223c is set in the effect execution game state flag 223k. Specifically, since the current big hit type is a probable big hit, the post-hit game state 223c is set to ON, and the effect execution time game state flag 223k is set to ON, as is the post-hit game state flag 223c. The

  Next, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. In the process of S4008, the acquired prediction precondition and the effect execution gaming state flag 223k are acquired. Are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the effect execution game state flag 223k match, the main jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are Match in device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery. In this case, the processing of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the big hit lottery is off, the process branches to S4010: No, and the state of the game execution state flag 223k is maintained as it is. As described above, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change while the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out. Therefore, while the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be out, maintaining the state of the game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are displayed at the time of performance execution. It can be indicated by a game state flag 223k.

  Next, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved second area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. In the process of S4008, the acquired prediction precondition and the stage-specific gaming state flag 223k are acquired. Are compared. In this comparison, since the acquired prediction precondition and the gaming state of the effect execution game state flag 223k match, the main jackpot lottery prediction result and the actual jackpot lottery lottery result are Match in device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery. In this case, the processing of S4010 is executed, and it is determined whether the obtained prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Here, since the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot, the process branches to S4010: Yes, and the game state at the end of the jackpot, that is, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot, is displayed in the effect execution game state flag 223k. Is set. Specifically, the game execution state flag 223k is set off. As a result, the game execution state flag 223k indicates the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the second jackpot lottery.

  Next, the prediction result of the big hit lottery and the prediction precondition are acquired from the reserved third area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. In the process of S4008, the acquired prediction precondition and the stage state gaming state flag 223k are acquired. Are compared. However, in this comparison, the acquired prediction precondition is different from the gaming state of the game state flag 223k at the time of performance execution, and further, the prediction result of the acquired jackpot lottery is out of order. It becomes unclear whether the prediction result and the actual lottery lottery result match in main controller 110. For this reason, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot trust the acquired prediction result of the jackpot lottery.

  In this case, the process proceeds to S4013, and a negative sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in each holding area from the holding third area to the holding fourth area in the holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Then, the continuous notice execution status indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the changing effect is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the changing effect but is canceled. Specifically, the status value of the reserved third area is changed to “−2” and the status value of the reserved fourth area is changed to “−12”. The status changes to indicate that

  Here, among the continuous notice execution statuses stored in the hold first area to the hold fourth area, the continuous notice execution status that is a positive number is stored in the hold first area and the hold second area. There will be two. Therefore, in the process of S4103, the process branches to S4103: Yes, and a minus sign is assigned to the continuous notice execution status stored in the hold first area and the hold second area.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 68 (b-2), the status values from the reserved first area to the reserved third area are all changed to “−2”, and the status value of the reserved fourth area is changed to “−12”. Thus, the status indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed in the changing effect is all changed to the status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed in the changing effect but is canceled. Then, the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process D ends.

  Then, after the current continuous notice execution status confirmation process D is completed, that is, after the probability variation jackpot being executed is completed, it is executed from the first time to the fourth time in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 60). Since the status value of the continuous notice status is “−2” or “−12” every time the change effect stop type is set, the process branches to S3706: No and is instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110. The set stop type is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 as it is.

  As a result, in each variation effect from the first time to the fourth time, the execution of the continuous notice effect is stopped and the normal stop display is performed. That is, the continuous notice effect itself is stopped, and the continuous notice effect is never executed. As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed is 2 or less, the continuous notice effect is set to be executed over a plurality of variable effects. Since the number of times of the event is small, the continuous notice effect itself is stopped, and the continuous notice effect is never executed. However, when the continuous notice effect is performed, since the continuous notice effect lasts for a long time, the player can have a long-awaited expectation that the game state is advantageous to the player.

  The above is the description of the second embodiment. As described above, in the second embodiment, as an example that the sound lamp control device 113 can appropriately handle the prediction result of the big hit lottery, in the process related to the continuous notice effect, the prediction result of the big hit lottery is preferably handled, The example which performs a continuous notice effect was demonstrated.

  That is, according to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes A to D (see FIGS. 61, 63, 65, and 66), in the process of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state By comparing the gaming state indicated by the flag 223j, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery are obtained. In the main controller 110, it can be compared whether they match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not memorized in the first place, the pachinko machine from the time when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big win lottery to the time when the actual big win lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. When ten game states change, it becomes unclear in which game state prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the main hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current big hit lottery match with the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current big hit lottery in the main controller 110. Become. Therefore, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery may be different in the main controller 110. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine, The lottery prediction results were treated as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the prediction precondition and the game state flag 223j are stored in the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number table used in the prefetch corresponding to the current jackpot lottery It can always be determined whether 202a1 and 202a2 match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current jackpot lottery. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main hitting random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the current jackpot lottery match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not to do so, the present embodiment can make this determination.

  When the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared and the tables 202a1 and 202a2 used for comparison are also the same, so that each comparison result And the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can handle the current jackpot lottery prediction result as reliable. In this way, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as reliable. In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S3803, when the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, the prefetching corresponding to the current big hit lottery was used. This is a case where the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the current big hit lottery do not match in the main controller 110. Therefore, it is unclear whether the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery in the main control device 110. In this case, even in the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery The prediction result of the lottery cannot be trusted, and the use of the prediction result will be refrained.

  However, in the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Accordingly, in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j, and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetching corresponding to the current jackpot lottery Even if the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in this jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, if the jackpot lottery prediction result in the prefetch information is a jackpot in the process of S3804, In the corresponding actual jackpot lottery, the lottery result is lost. That is, in this case, the prediction result of the current jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery are not unclear whether they match in the main controller 110, and are uniquely determined to be off. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the game state indicated by the game state flag 223j, and the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information may be out of the process in S3804. For example, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the current jackpot If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the time of the next jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery is also unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent big hit lottery.

  In such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, a minus sign is added to the continuous notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a (S3805), and the continuous notice execution status is changed. In the effect, the status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed but is canceled. As a result, when the above-described change display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the change effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No, and the continuous change effect at this time is continuous. The execution of the notice effect can be canceled. In other words, when it is unclear whether the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery will be a jackpot or not, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be stopped for the variable change executed this time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  On the other hand, in such a case, in the continuous advance notice execution status confirmation processes B, C, and D, not only the continuous advance notice execution status stored in the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a but also all the reserved areas are stored. The continuous notice execution status is also changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. As a result, the above-described change display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed, and the change effect for which the continuous notice effect is scheduled to be executed can be branched to S3706: No each time the stop type is set. In addition, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be canceled in each variable effect that is scheduled to be executed. Therefore, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery after this time is unknown, a continuous notice effect is performed on the dark clouds, and there is a problem that a continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67), in the process of S4008, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the effect execution game state flag 223k. By comparing the game state shown, the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the next big hit lottery and the big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next big hit lottery are main control. It can be compared in the device 110 whether they match.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, since the prediction precondition is not memorized in the first place, the pachinko machine from the time when the main controller 110 pre-reads the lottery result of the big win lottery to the time when the actual big win lottery corresponding to the pre-read is performed. When ten game states change, it becomes unclear in which game state prefetching of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed before the change was performed. Therefore, it becomes unclear whether main hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the prefetch corresponding to the current big hit lottery match with big hit random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current big hit lottery in main controller 110.

  As described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the next jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the latest jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the current jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the game state at the time of the next jackpot lottery becomes unknown, and the lottery result of the next jackpot lottery also becomes unknown. Note that the lottery result is also unclear in the subsequent big hit lottery.

  Accordingly, if there is a possibility that the main jackpot lottery prediction result and the current jackpot lottery lottery result are different in the main controller 110, the next jackpot lottery prediction result and the subsequent jackpot lottery lottery Since there is a possibility that the result may differ, the conventional sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine has treated not only this time but also the prediction result of the big hit lottery after the next time as unreliable.

  However, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the prediction precondition and the effect execution game state flag 223k, so the jackpot random number table 202a1 used in prefetching corresponding to the jackpot lottery from the next time onward is stored. 202a2 and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the subsequent jackpot lottery can always be determined. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the main control includes the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the look-ahead corresponding to the jackpot lottery after the next time and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the jackpot lottery after the next time. Even in the case where it is unclear whether or not they match in the device 110, this embodiment can make this determination.

  When the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 match, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery matches the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can treat the prediction result of the big hit lottery as being reliable. In this way, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is treated as unreliable, the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 may be treated as reliable. In the form, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled appropriately.

  Further, as described above, in the process of S4012, if the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the performance state gaming state flag 223k, the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery is performed. Is the case where the main controller 110 does not match the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the above and the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, since it becomes unclear whether the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery match in the main controller 110, in this case, the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment Even in 113, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, and the prediction result is not used.

  However, in the present embodiment, the hit value stored in the low probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a1 and the hit value stored in the high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2 are not duplicated values. Each hit value is set. Therefore, a numerical value that is a winning value in one of the tables 202a1 and 202a2 is an outlier in the other tables 202a1 and 202a2. Therefore, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 to be compared is the same, the counter value C1 is compared with one of the jackpot random number tables 202a1, and if the result is determined to be a jackpot, When the counter value C1 is compared with the other jackpot random number table 202a1, the result is always determined to be out of place.

  Therefore, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetching information is different from the gaming state indicated by the performance state gaming state flag 223k, and the jackpot random number table used in the prefetching corresponding to the i-th jackpot lottery Even if 202a1, 202a2 and the jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 scheduled to be used in the i-th jackpot lottery do not match in the main controller 110, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the look-ahead information is a jackpot in the process of S4012. If there is, in the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result, the lottery result is lost. In other words, in this case, the prediction result of the i-th jackpot lottery and the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery are not unknown whether they match in the main controller 110 and are uniquely determined to be off. In the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be treated as reliable.

  Therefore, even if the sound lamp control device 113 of the conventional pachinko machine is used as an unreliable prediction result, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment may be treated as reliable. In the embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be handled more suitably.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4012, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information is different from the gaming state indicated by the effect execution game state flag 223k, and in the process of S4012, the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the prefetch information is If it is off, the actual jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result is unknown. In the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the current jackpot lottery are determined based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the jackpot lottery, and the current jackpot If the lottery result of the lottery is a jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is newly set according to the jackpot type.

  Therefore, the jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 used in the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery are determined by the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery. Therefore, if the lottery result of the i-th jackpot lottery is unknown, the gaming state at the (i + 1) th jackpot lottery is unknown, and the lottery results of the subsequent jackpot lotteries are also unknown.

  Therefore, when checking the prediction results corresponding to the jackpot lottery one by one, once the prediction result of the jackpot lottery becomes unknown, the remaining prediction results are also unknown, so check the remaining prediction results. There is no point. In this embodiment, when the prediction result in prefetch information becomes unknown, it branches to S4012: No and confirmation is not performed about the remaining prefetch information, Therefore Execution of an unnecessary process can be suppressed.

  Further, in such a case, in the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C process, the continuous notice execution stored in the respective reserved areas from the reserved i-th area to the reserved M-th area among the reserved areas of the prefetch information storage area 223a. A minus sign is attached to the status, and the continuous notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the changing effect but was canceled.

  As a result, when the above-described change display setting process (see FIG. 60) is executed and the stop type of the change effect to be executed this time is set, it is possible to branch to S3706: No, and the continuous change effect at this time is continuous. The execution of the notice effect can be canceled. Therefore, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the continuous notice effect is executed in the dark clouds and the continuous notice effect that is not related to the actual lottery result is executed.

  Further, according to the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the execution area of the prefetch information storage area 223a. Alternatively, it can be determined whether or not the prefetch information stored in the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) is reliable. And when unreliable information is found among the prefetch information, it is continuously changed over each variation production from the variation production corresponding to the prefetch information to the last variation production scheduled to execute the continuous notice production. The notice effect can be canceled.

  In addition, when the number of times of continuous notice effect is executed is 2 or less, it is set to execute the continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable effects, but the number of times that the continuous notice effect is performed is small. The continuous notice effect itself is canceled and the continuous notice effect is never executed. However, when the continuous notice effect is performed, since the continuous notice effect lasts for a long time, the player can have a long-awaited expectation that the game state is advantageous to the player.

  The “big hit” described in the embodiment corresponds to the “special game state” described in the claims, and the “chance” described in the embodiment is the “suggestion information” described in the claims. Corresponding to Further, the “high probability state or high probability hourly jackpot random number table 202a2” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “an example of a plurality of lottery conditions” described in the claims, and “low” described in the above embodiment. The “probability state or low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1” corresponds to “an example of a plurality of lottery conditions” recited in the claims. The “bit value indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “judgment result information” described in the claims, and the “prefetch command” described in the above embodiment The “bit value indicating the prediction precondition included in” corresponds to the “judgment information” described in the claims, and is set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot included in the fanfare command described in the above embodiment. The “bit value indicating the gaming state” corresponds to “condition information” recited in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eye” at the end of the variation effect is a continuous notice effect, but during the variation effect, an image different from normal or a sound different from normal is displayed. An effect such as emitting a sound may be used as a continuous notice effect. If comprised in this way, it is not necessary to change the stop type of each variable effect which performs a continuous notice effect to the "chance eyes", and the stop type instruct | indicated by the stop type command from the main control apparatus 110 is used as it is. it can. In addition, since the continuous notice effect can be performed in the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Moreover, when performing a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable effects, the contents of the effects may be changed for each variable effect, or the contents of the effect may be changed only for some of the variable effects. In addition, if the prediction result that triggered the continuous notice effect is a big hit and the prediction result is reliable, the continuous notice suggesting the big hit is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2). You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. The continuous notice effect may be performed during the variation effect, or may be performed during the variation effect and at the end of the variation. Further, when the continuous notice effect is performed during the variable effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, C, and D may be executed when the variable effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  Further, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process A (see FIG. 61), in the process of S3803, the gaming state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag 223j are different. (S3803: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3804 to determine whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, but in the case of S3803: No, the jackpot lottery If the prediction result cannot be trusted, the process may proceed to S3805 without performing S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes B, C, and D (see FIGS. 63, 65, and 67), in the process of S3803, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game state flag 223j are set. If the gaming state shown is different from the gaming state shown (S3803: No), the process proceeds to S3804, where it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the execution area is a jackpot, S3803 : In the case of No, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may not be trusted, and the process of S3901 may be performed without performing the process of S3804.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, and C (see FIGS. 61, 63, and 656), the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received by the sound lamp controller 113, and This is executed when a variation effect is started in the three-symbol display device 81. However, in the present embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is performed at the end of the changing effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A is performed immediately after the changing effect is started and immediately before the changing effect is ended. , B, and C may be executed at any time. When the continuous notice effect is performed during the fluctuating effect, the continuous notice execution status confirmation processing A, B, C may be executed when the fluctuating effect is started as in the present embodiment.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67), in the process of S4009, the game state indicated by the prediction precondition in the prefetch information and the game indicated by the effect execution state game state flag 223k. If the game state is different from the state (S4009: No), the process proceeds to S4012, where it is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, S4009 : In the case of No, it may be configured to shift to the processing of S4013 without performing the processing of S4012 on the assumption that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery cannot be trusted.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes C and D (see FIGS. 65 and 67), the prediction result of the big hit lottery in the reserved i-th area is a big hit by the process of S4010 among the repeated processes of S4007 to S4015. However, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the reserved i-th area is a jackpot, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can not be trusted and the process may be interrupted repeatedly. good.

  In addition, the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process C (see FIG. 65) is executed when the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, but instead of the case where the variation effect is started, the jackpot You may comprise so that it may be executed during. By configuring to be executed during the jackpot, the number of executions of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process C can be suppressed.

  In the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67), if the number of executions of the continuous notice effect is 2 or less, the continuous notice effect itself is stopped, but the number is not limited to two. Any setting can be made.

  In addition, in the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation processes A, B, C, and D (see FIGS. 61, 63, 65, and 67), if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is unreliable, it corresponds to the unreliable prediction result. The continuous notice execution status is changed to a status indicating that the continuous notice effect was scheduled to be executed in the variable effect but was canceled. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is not reliable, not only the unreliable prediction result but also the continuous notice execution status corresponding to the reliable prediction result is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect. However, the status may be changed to indicate that it has been canceled.

  Further, the above-described continuous notice execution status confirmation process D (see FIG. 67) is executed when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be executed. You may comprise so that it may be performed when the fluctuation production is started in the apparatus 81. Further, it may be executed at any time from the start of the variation effect until just before the end of the variation effect. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may be performed during jackpot. By configuring to be executed during the jackpot, the number of executions of the continuous notice execution status confirmation process D can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, when it is determined in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59) that the continuous notice effect is to be executed, the reserved area (holding 1 area to reserved fourth area) of the prefetch information storage area 223a. ), The continuous notice execution status of each holding area in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored is a status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 ". After that, the continuous notice execution status is scheduled to be executed in the variable effect by using the continuous notice execution status confirmation process A, B, C, D for the continuous notice execution status of each holding area where the unreliable prediction results are stored. However, the status is changed to “−1, −2, −3, −11, −12, −13” indicating that it has been canceled. On the other hand, in the above-described continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 59), only the reserved area in which the reliable prediction result is stored among the reserved areas in which the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored. The status “1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13” indicating that the continuous notice effect is executed may be set.

  In the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment, a game state flag 223j configured in the same manner as the game state flag 203a of the main control device 110 is provided. As described above, in the main control device 110, if the big hit lottery prefetching is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is off, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1 is referred to and the lottery result of the big win lottery is obtained. Read ahead. On the other hand, when the big hit lottery prefetching is performed when the gaming state flag 203a is on, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 is referred to and the big hit lottery lottery result is prefetched. Then, when the big hit lottery prefetching is performed in the main control device 110, information indicating the prediction result of the big hit lottery is immediately notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command. Therefore, when the pre-read command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, which jackpot random number table 202a1, 202a2 is used by referring to the state of the gaming state flag 223j configured similarly to the gaming state flag 203a. Thus, it can be determined whether or not the pre-reading has been performed in the main controller 110, and the prediction precondition can be determined. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prediction precondition storage area 223a3 of the prefetch information storage area 223a, when the prefetch command is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction precondition is included therein. It does not have to be included. As described above, in the main controller 110, when pre-fetching of the big hit lottery is performed during the big hit, the low probability time big hit is based on the post-hit gaming state flag 203d indicating the gaming state at the end of the big hit. It is determined whether to refer to the random number table 202a1 or to refer to the high probability big hit random number table 202a2. The sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a jackpot after game state flag 223c configured in the same manner as the jackpot after game state flag 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a pre-read command is received during the jackpot, any of the jackpot after-game state flag 223c configured in the same manner as the jackpot after-game state flag 203d is referred to. The jackpot random number tables 202a1 and 202a2 are used to determine whether the main control device 110 has been prefetched during the jackpot. Therefore, since the prediction precondition can be stored in the prefetch information storage area 223a prediction precondition storage area 223a3, when a prefetch command is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction precondition is included therein. It is not necessary. That is, with this configuration, the conventional main controller 110 can be used as it is. Therefore, the development cost of the gaming machine and the burden on the designer can be reduced.

  Further, in the variation process (see FIG. 21) of the above embodiment, the big hit start is set in the process of S314, and subsequently, the big hit medium flag 203e is set to ON in the process of S315. As described above, when the jackpot start is set in the process of S314, when the jackpot control process (S803) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed, the process proceeds to S901: Yes (see FIG. 27). Branch. Therefore, in the big hit control process, when branching to S901: Yes, the big hit medium flag 203e may be set to ON. In other words, as long as the flag 203e is set to ON before the start of the jackpot, any processing may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the setting of the state of the jackpot after gaming state flag 203d (S410 and S411 in FIG. 22) is performed in the variation start process (see FIG. 22). In a jackpot control process (see FIG. 27) described later, this is referred to when the process of S902 is executed and a fanfare command is generated. Therefore, it may be set at any timing as long as it is before the processing of S902 is executed.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is provided. However, if each process is executed by the main control device 110 in a single task method, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g may not be provided. If the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is not provided, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203e is referred to instead of the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is started in the single task method, another processing (main processing, other interrupt processing, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt processing ends. Since there is no, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired with the start winning is acquired with the start winning with the big win, by referring to the big hit winning flag 203e.

  In the above embodiment, the winning game state flag is provided. However, if each process is executed in the single control method in the main control device 110, the winning game state flag may not be provided. If no winning game state flag is provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that has won the start-up prize, and when the ball starts to win the first entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 Each value of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are acquired. The gaming state flag 203a acquired here is used as a winning gaming state flag. Therefore, if the winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning is a high probability state, and if the winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko at the time of starting winning is shown. It shows that the gaming state of the machine 10 was a low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is started in the single task method, another processing (main processing, other interrupt processing, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt processing ends. Since there is no, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the game state flag 203a does not change after the start winning process (see FIG. 20) described above is started until the prefetching process ends. Therefore, in the prefetch process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. Note that when the winning game state flag is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the process of S207 in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20), so the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  Further, in the prefetching process of the above embodiment (see FIG. 23), for the winning prize during the jackpot, the prefetching is performed with the gaming state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition, and the accuracy of the lottery result prediction is increased. It is improving. As described above, the gaming state at the end of the jackpot is determined at the time of the jackpot lottery immediately before the jackpot, and after that determination, the game state at the end of the jackpot can be prefetched using the prediction precondition. Therefore, in addition to the winning prize during the jackpot, the winning prize until the jackpot is started after the jackpot type is determined in the jackpot lottery is pre-read based on the gaming state at the end of the jackpot as a prediction precondition. You may make it do. Thereby, the chance that the main controller 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual jackpot lottery result corresponding to the prediction result can be increased. Therefore, since the number of prediction results handled as credible in the audio lamp control device 113 can be increased, the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be used more suitably.

  In the look-ahead process (see FIG. 23) of the above-described embodiment, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is provided. Need not be provided. If the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g is not provided, the jackpot / medium winning flag 203e is referred to instead of the jackpot / medium winning flag 203g. When the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is started in the single task method, another processing (main processing, other interrupt processing, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt processing ends. Since there is no, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the big hit flag 203e does not change from the start of execution of the start winning process (see FIG. 20) until the end of the prefetching process. Therefore, in the pre-reading process, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the data acquired with the start winning is acquired with the start winning with the big win, by referring to the big hit winning flag 203e.

  In the pre-reading process of the above embodiment (see FIG. 23), a winning game state flag is provided. However, when each process is executed in the single control method in the main controller 110, a winning game state flag. Need not be provided. If no winning game state flag is provided, the game state flag 203a is referred to instead of the winning game state flag. As described above, the winning game state flag is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 that has won the start-up prize, and when the ball starts to win the first entrance 64, each counter C1 to C1 Each value of C3 and CS1 and the game state flag 203a are acquired. The game state flag 203a acquired here is used as a winning game state flag. Therefore, if the winning game state flag is ON, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning is a high probability state, and if the winning game state flag is ON, the pachinko at the time of starting winning is shown. It shows that the gaming state of the machine 10 was a low probability state. When the above-described timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) is started in the single task method, another processing (main processing, other interrupt processing, etc.) is executed until the timer interrupt processing ends. Since there is no, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. That is, the state of the game state flag 203a does not change after the start winning process (see FIG. 20) described above is started until the prefetching process ends. Therefore, in the prefetch process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of starting winning can be determined by referring to the gaming state 203a. Note that when the winning game state flag is not provided, it is not necessary to execute the process of S207 in the above-described start winning process (see FIG. 20), so the burden on the MPU 201 can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to provide the winning game state storage area 203b5 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is notified by the fanfare command from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113, but the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot In this case, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 whether the current jackpot is a promising jackpot or a normal jackpot by the stop type command described above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Therefore, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot in the fanfare command.

  In the above embodiment, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is notified from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by the fanfare command. Notification of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the time of the end of the big jackpot from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 by other commands such as a pattern command, a stop type command, a round number command, and an ending command. You may do it. That is, the main controller 110 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and after the jackpot type is determined, until the sound lamp controller 113 determines the display mode of the ending effect. Any command may be used as long as it is a command transmitted from 110 and received by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition to the fanfare command, a command indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is newly provided, and the new command allows the pachinko machine 10 to be set at the end of the current jackpot. The game state may be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when a new command is provided separately from the fanfare command, the fanfare command may not include information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot.

  In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 of the above embodiment receives a fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set at the end of the current jackpot is extracted from the fanfare command. Then, the big hit after game state flag 223c is set according to the game state. However, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the main controller 110 determines whether the current jackpot is a promising jackpot or a normal jackpot according to the stop type command described above. 113 is notified. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current big hit based on the big hit type indicated by the stop type command. Accordingly, when the stop type command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, if the stop type command indicates the jackpot type, the after jackpot gaming state flag 223c is set according to the jackpot type. May be. In the case of such a configuration, it is not always necessary to include information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot in the fanfare command.

  Moreover, although the ending effect determination process (refer FIG. 33) of the said embodiment is comprised so that it may be performed when the ending command transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 is received, an ending effect determination process is a ending effect. Since it is a process for determining the display mode, it may be executed and ended before the ending effect is started. In other words, it may be executed any time as long as it ends before the ending effect is started after the fanfare command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in addition to the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, the prediction result of the variation pattern type, and the like, the information indicating the prediction precondition is further included in the prefetch command. However, the information included in the prefetch command is not limited to information indicating the prediction precondition, and the sound lamp control device 113 can determine which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the big hit lottery. Any information can be used. For example, information indicating which table 202a1 or 202a2 is used to obtain the prediction result of the jackpot lottery may be included in the prefetch command.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the process which determines the display mode of an ending effect was mentioned as an example as an example which can handle suitably the prediction result of a jackpot lottery in the audio lamp control apparatus 113, the prediction result of a jackpot lottery was shown as an example. If it is a process to be used, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery can be suitably handled as in the process of determining the display mode of the ending effect. For example, even when the display mode of the continuous notice effect is set, the prediction result of the big hit lottery can be suitably handled.

  In the above embodiment, the fanfare command includes the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thus, the other command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 including information indicating the skill state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot. For example, information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot may be included in the round number command or the ending command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, when the ending command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the ending effect determination process, but the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit. If it is in the middle and before the ending effect is performed, the ending effect determination process may be executed at any time.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control device 110 includes the information indicating the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot in the fanfare command, and transmits the fanfare command to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 extracts the gaming state at the end of the jackpot from the received fanfare command. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot based on the stop type extracted from the stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). You may do it. That is, if the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command is a probable jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a high probability state, and the jackpot type indicated by the stop type command If it is normal jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot is a low probability state. In such a determination, the main controller 110 does not need to include information indicating the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the current jackpot in the fanfare command. The control burden of 110 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 includes the prefetch prediction precondition in the prefetch command and transmits the prefetch command to the sound lamp control device 113. It may be included in the hold number command and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the pending number command is generated after the prefetching is completed.

  In the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, the prefetch information stored in the reserved area of the prefetch information storage area 223a is acquired one by one in the order of the stored order, and the prediction precondition of the prefetch information is determined. Are compared with the gaming state indicated by the after-hit gaming state flag 223c, and when each indicates the same gaming state, it is confirmed whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information is a jackpot, First of all, it is confirmed whether there is any pre-read information stored in the hold area of the pre-read information storage area 223a indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and indicates that the lottery result is a big win If there is, it may be possible to compare the prediction precondition of the prefetch information with the gaming state indicated by the jackpot after gaming state flag 223c. .

  Moreover, in the ending effect determination process of the said embodiment, while acquiring the prefetch information stored in the holding area of the prefetch information storage area 223a one by one in the order of the stored order, If the game state indicated by the after-hit gaming state flag 223c is compared with each other and the same gaming state is indicated, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information indicates a jackpot, an ending effect is displayed. It is configured to determine whether or not to set “definite effect display” as an aspect. On the other hand, the pre-read information stored in the hold area of the pre-read information storage area 223a is acquired one by one regardless of the stored order, and the pre-prediction information prediction precondition and the jackpot after game state flag 223c are acquired. If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the pre-read information indicates a jackpot when the same gaming state is compared with each other, the display mode of the ending effect is “definite effect display” It may be configured to determine whether or not to set. As described above, if the prediction precondition of the prefetch information matches the gaming state indicated by the post-hit gaming state flag 223c, the prediction result corresponding to the prediction precondition is the actual lottery lottery result. Is likely to match. Therefore, even though the “decision effect display” is performed in the ending effect, the jackpot effect (ending effect) is subsequently ended, and even if all the jackpot lotteries held at the end of the jackpot effect are performed, In practice, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result does not become a big hit. Accordingly, it is possible to further suppress disappointment of the player by giving the player a sense of useless expectation, and therefore, it is possible to further suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can continue to have a willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, in the main controller 110 of the above embodiment, when pre-reading for the start winning is performed, information indicating the pre-prediction prediction precondition, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the variation pattern type Is included in the pre-read command, and the pre-read command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. However, without transmitting the pre-read command, the information indicating the pre-prediction prediction precondition and the jackpot lottery Information indicating the prediction result and information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type may be included in the reserved ball number command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, the reserved ball number command includes both the reserved ball number and the prediction result (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern type) of the prefetch. Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command, the correspondence between the number of held balls and the prediction result of the prefetching becomes clear. That is, even if attention is not paid to the command reception timing and the timing to acquire the number of reserved balls and the prefetched prediction result from the RAM, the correspondence between the number of held balls and the prefetched prediction result is always accurate. And the like can be executed accurately. In addition, when pre-reading about the start winning prize is performed, a part of the information indicating the prediction precondition of the pre-reading, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery, and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern type It may be included in the pre-read command and the rest may be included in the reserved ball number command and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Moreover, in the ending effect determination process of the above embodiment, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information matches the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery in the prefetch information indicates a jackpot. In this case, “determined effect display” is set as the display mode of the ending effect with a probability of 1/3.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the 3rd symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and as a result, the 3rd symbol display device 81 The variation effect according to the variation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when the execution time of the variation effect ends, the stop type stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing stop display of a stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from the main control device 110, the scheduled execution time of the variable effect is set. You may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued even if it complete | finishes.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 prefetches the start winning. However, the audio lamp control device 113 may prefetch the start winning. In that case, if a start winning is detected in main controller 110, each value of first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1, and the pachinko at the time of winning The gaming state of the machine 10 (in the case of a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1, Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the sound lamp controller ROM 222. Further, the prefetching process (see FIG. 23) executed in the main control device 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that it can be executed in the audio lamp control device 113. With this configuration, when a pre-read command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various counter values from the pre-read command, and the lottery of the big hit lottery The result can be prefetched. As a result, the main controller 110 does not need to pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, so the control burden on the main controller 110 can be further reduced and the transition should be made based on the entrance to the first entrance 64. It can concentrate on the lottery process which draws a game state. However, since an important random number such as a jackpot random number may be found illegally, a lottery result (win / fail), stop type, and variation pattern should be included in the pre-read command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Is preferred. For example, it is possible to prevent a signal output from the main controller 110 from being stolen illegally and analyzing each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In addition, it is possible to prevent an analysis of an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is made from a signal output from the main controller 110.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in the audio lamp control apparatus 113, the process (continuous notice determination process of FIG. 32) which determines whether a continuous notice effect is started, or the process which determines the display mode of an ending effect (FIG. 33). However, the display control device 114 may execute these processes. In that case, a program for executing each process so that the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 32 and the ending setting process shown in FIG. 33 can be executed in the display control device 114, and the continuous notice determination table 222a are provided. It is stored in the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area 234a1). Also, the work RAM 233 includes the above-described pre-read information storage area 223a, the number of held balls counter 223b, the after-hit gaming state flag 223c, the ending state counter 223f, the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223g, the continuous advance notice counter 223h, the post-notice big hit flag 223i, etc. Each memory is provided. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the display control device 114 receives the prefetch command, the display control device 114 executes processing for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect (continuous notice determination processing in FIG. 32). Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command as it is to the display control device 114 when receiving the ending command from the main control device 110. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 114 executes processing for determining the display mode of the ending effect (ending setting processing in FIG. 33).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or when the access ends, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and is read from the character ROM 234 while drawing the image. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured with one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM judgment value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to an instantaneous power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  Although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 47). The warning image may be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 48) when the above-mentioned is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. In addition, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing contents and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control unit 114, after the power is turned on, first, only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the rear image of the super reach that is expected to have a high appearance frequency or a high frequency is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, whereby the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 includes the third symbol display device 81 Even if the fourth notice display device is provided and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination thereof), even if a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, time shortage hit, miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect are prepared. Good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notification effects different from a variation effect was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when a continuous notification effect was performed, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Instead, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command process (see FIG. 37) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and other stop symbol discrimination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process. Therefore, instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol. Occasionally, chances can be confirmed. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S1211) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 31), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, triggered by the reception of this command. Also good. Thereby, before the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started. The image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous notice effect in a subarea dedicated to the continuous notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. As a result, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous notice effect is the last, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous notice effect while the continuous notice effect is being performed. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern, and each continuous A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. You may make it set to 233d. In other words, the display data table may include a drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and a drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Accordingly, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the image data transfer instruction corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in accordance with reception of the display variation pattern command. Thereby, since it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

  In the above-described embodiment, the stop pattern of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, reach other than out / rear reach, complete out reach) determined by the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variation effect that has been suspended is displayed. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, instead of the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but is always a back-and-forth deviation reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing a continuous notice effect together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, each variation effect will be performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each variation. Further, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the change effect other than the last change effect that has been put on hold is changed to the change effect. Then, the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1504 in FIG. 38) changes the variation pattern in accordance with the setting state of the continuous notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. May be. If the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the change effect is displayed as it is based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 110. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed in the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In the situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one game entrance 13 is provided on the game board 13 where a lottery lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be provided in the game board 13 where entrances are detected independently and a big winning lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect when receiving the number-of-holding balls command, all the first entrances at that time are determined. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the fluctuating effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, the main ball number command is sent to the main control device 110). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 only when the value (N) of the held ball number counter 203c increases in the main controller 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command can be reduced. The control burden of 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects that have been put on hold at that time. As described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each of the variable effects. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, the counter is updated every time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 33) is executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. It may be provided. In the continuous notice determination process, when a continuous notice effect is performed (S1316: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the reserved ball counter 223b when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the number of times of execution of the remaining continuous notice effects, the variation pattern of the variable effect for which the determination is performed, and a series The game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15 probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15 normal jackpot, miss), or a combination of two or more of these. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of a command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence is generated. Various flags such as a flag are generated. Based on the flag, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as a warning image is generated. Or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is configured that each of the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown. Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information associated with establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one stored random number information, and lottery for determining a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions from random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means A main unit for controlling a game and having a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit is completed. Report either one of the control means, the first suggestion information that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and the second suggestion information that is different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery condition setting means The first lottery condition acquisition unit for acquiring the lottery condition set by the first lottery condition acquisition unit, and the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition unit. A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result when determined by the determination result, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means. Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination result information for the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information in association with each other, and condition information for the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The comparison means for comparing the condition and the notification by the notification means, the first suggestion information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine A1 comprising: a notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of the hint information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when a predetermined start condition is established, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions is lottery from the random number information. It is determined by the determination means, and the special gaming state is shifted according to the lottery result. Moreover, one of the 1st suggestion information which suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state is ended. In such a case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set by the lottery condition setting unit. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is established, the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and the lottery result determination means performs the lottery with the acquired lottery conditions. The lottery result when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination unit is determined. Then, determination information including determination result information indicating the lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. Further, when the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmitting unit. In the sub-control unit, when the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the determination information receiving unit, the determination result information of the received determination information is associated with the determination condition information. It is stored in the determination information storage means. The condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If it is refrained, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means, and therefore notification by the notification means is refrained. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine A1, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended, the first suggestion information and the second One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means can be notified using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means. It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means is wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be handled appropriately.

  In the gaming machine A1, the notification control means, as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery conditions indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means and the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. The gaming machine A2 is configured to control the notifying unit so that the second suggestion information is notified when the lottery condition shown does not match.

  According to the gaming machine A2, as a result of the comparison by the comparison unit, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit are inconsistent. In such a case, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. If the lottery conditions of the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery conditions for determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery results Since the lottery result determined by the determination means and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means may not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine A2, when the lottery condition for the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition for the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. The second suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification unit regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the use of an untrustworthy lottery result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In the gaming machine A2, the notification control means determines the lottery conditions indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means and the condition information received by the condition information receiving means as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the first suggestion information is notified. A gaming machine A3 that controls the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the first suggestion information is notified. The If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means The lottery result determined by the lottery determination result matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine A3, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. In this case, if the credible lottery result indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the first suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to make a notification by the notifying means by using a reliable lottery result among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining means. In other words, since the reliable lottery results determined by the lottery result determination unit can be used, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the determination information storage unit stores determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means obtains, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information that has not been determined by the lottery determination means. In the comparison by the determination result information acquisition means and the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is stopped when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match. Comparison determination means, and for the determination condition information acquired by the determination result information acquisition means, the determination condition information is displayed in order from the oldest reception order. And drawing conditions, the gaming machine is characterized in that to compare the drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit acquires that the lottery determination corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, for the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means by the comparison means, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is stopped by the first comparison stop means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result that is first performed by the lottery determination unit after the special gaming state ends, the lottery condition becomes the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the special gaming state is completed, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order The lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is determined by the lottery determination means while the lottery conditions match with each other. Is likely to match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match when the comparison is performed, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In subsequent comparisons, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine A4, while there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit match, the comparison by the comparison unit can be continued. If the results match or are unclear, the comparison can be stopped. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when it becomes meaningless even if the comparison by the comparison means is performed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the determination information storage unit stores determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. The comparison means obtains, among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination of the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information that has not been determined by the lottery determination means. In the comparison by the determination result information acquisition means and the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and is associated with the judgment condition information that matches the lottery condition. A second comparison canceling means for canceling the comparison by the comparison means when the determination result information being displayed indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. Among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order, and the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, A gaming machine A5 characterized by comparing the above.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the determination information storage unit stores determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit acquires that the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, with respect to the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared by the comparison means. In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition is changed to the special gaming state. When the lottery result to be transferred is indicated, the comparison by the comparison unit is stopped by the second comparison stop unit. Here, in the determination of the lottery result that is first performed by the lottery determination unit after the special gaming state ends, the lottery condition becomes the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the special gaming state is completed, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order The lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is determined by the lottery determination means while the lottery conditions match with each other. Is likely to match. According to the gaming machine A5, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is When the lottery result for shifting to the special game state is indicated, even when the determination condition information scheduled to compare the lottery conditions remains, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be further reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the comparison unit stores the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information reception unit and the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification is performed by the notification unit. A gaming machine A6, which compares the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification by the notification unit is performed. Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison is performed by the comparison means, it is possible to wait until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that the determination condition information is stored can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity for comparison by the comparison means can be increased, and the opportunity for executing the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information associated with establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one stored random number information, and lottery for determining a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions from random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means A main unit for controlling a game and having a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit is completed. Report either one of the control means, the first suggestion information that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and the second suggestion information that is different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery condition setting means The first lottery condition acquisition unit for acquiring the lottery condition set by the first lottery condition acquisition unit, and the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition unit. A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result when determined by the determination result, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means. Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination result information for the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information in association with each other, and condition information for the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The comparison means for comparing the condition and the notification by the notification means, the first suggestion information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine B1 comprising: a notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of the hint information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when a predetermined start condition is established, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions is lottery from the random number information. It is determined by the determination means, and the special gaming state is shifted according to the lottery result. Moreover, one of the 1st suggestion information which suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state is ended. In such a case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set by the lottery condition setting unit. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is established, the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and the lottery result determination means performs the lottery with the acquired lottery conditions. The lottery result when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination unit is determined. Then, determination information including determination result information indicating the lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. Further, when the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmitting unit. In the sub-control unit, when the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the determination information receiving unit, the determination result information of the received determination information is associated with the determination condition information. It is stored in the determination information storage means. The condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If it is refrained, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means, and therefore notification by the notification means is refrained. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine B1, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended, the first suggestion information and the second One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means can be notified using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means. It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means is wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be handled appropriately.

  In any one of the gaming machine B1 and the gaming machines A1 to A6, the lottery condition setting unit sets the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit to a predetermined lottery condition when shifting to the special gaming state, and the lottery determination The means is configured to hold the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special gaming state until the end, and the main control means, when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, Setting by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended when the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means for determining whether or not the special gaming state is set. Third lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery condition to be performed, and if the lottery result determination means is determined to be in the special gaming state by the gaming state determination means, 3. The lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquisition means is used to determine a lottery result when the lottery determination means determines the random number information acquired when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when transitioning to the special gaming state, the lottery condition setting unit sets the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit to the predetermined lottery condition, and after transitioning to the special gaming state until the end The determination of random number information by the lottery determination means is suspended. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special game state is determined by the game state determination means. If the special control state is determined, the lottery is performed after the special game state ends. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquiring means. In addition, if it is determined by the gaming state determination means that the game state is the special gaming state, the random number information acquired when the predetermined start condition is established is determined by the lottery determination means under the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case of being determined by is determined by the lottery result determination means. Since the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, if the predetermined starting condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of the random number information associated with the establishment is This is done after the special game state is over. According to the gaming machine B2, when a predetermined start condition is established between the transition to the special game state and the end, the special game is not the predetermined lottery condition set during the special game state. The lottery result of the random number information associated with the establishment of the predetermined start condition can be determined by the lottery condition set for the lottery determination unit after the state ends. Therefore, even if a predetermined starting condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the judgment performed by the lottery judging means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so that the correct lottery The possibility that the result can be determined can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means appropriately can be increased.

  Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information associated with establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one stored random number information, and lottery for determining a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions from random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means A main unit for controlling a game and having a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit is completed. Report either one of the control means, the first suggestion information that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and the second suggestion information that is different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery condition setting means The first lottery condition acquisition unit for acquiring the lottery condition set by the first lottery condition acquisition unit, and the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition unit. A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result when determined by the determination result, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means. Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination result information for the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information in association with each other, and condition information for the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The comparison means for comparing the condition and the notification by the notification means, the first suggestion information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine C1 comprising: a notification control unit that controls the notification unit so that one of the hint information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when a predetermined start condition is established, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions is lottery from the random number information. It is determined by the determination means, and the special gaming state is shifted according to the lottery result. Moreover, one of the 1st suggestion information which suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state is ended. In such a case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set by the lottery condition setting unit. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is established, the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and the lottery result determination means performs the lottery with the acquired lottery conditions. The lottery result when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination unit is determined. Then, determination information including determination result information indicating the lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. Further, when the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmitting unit. In the sub-control unit, when the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the determination information receiving unit, the determination result information of the received determination information is associated with the determination condition information. It is stored in the determination information storage means. The condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If it is refrained, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means, and therefore notification by the notification means is refrained. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine C1, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended, the first suggestion information and the second One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means can be notified using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means. It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means is wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be handled appropriately.

  In any one of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is determined by the lottery determination unit according to random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition unit. Random number information indicating a lottery result to be determined and for determining a lottery result to be shifted to the special gaming state is configured to be different for each lottery condition, and the comparing means includes the determination condition information Until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match, for each determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information, The lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means is compared. In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the condition When the lottery conditions indicated by the information do not match, it is determined whether the determination result information associated with the determination condition information for which the lottery conditions do not match indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. And a comparison control for controlling the comparison means to continue the comparison when it is determined by the determination result information determination means to indicate a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. And the notification control means includes a lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means and a condition information received by the condition information receiving means as a result of the comparison by the comparison means. If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state when the lottery condition shown is the same, Gaming machine C2, which suggests information is characterized in that for controlling the informing means so as to broadcast.

  According to the gaming machine C2, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination unit in accordance with the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, and shifts to a special gaming state. The random number information for determining the lottery result is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Then, until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match by the comparison means, the determination condition information for each determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Are compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that does not match the lottery condition is displayed. It is determined by the determination result information determination means whether the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state is indicated. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state is shown, the comparison means is controlled by the comparison control means so as to continue the comparison. If the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, the judgment is made. If the determination result information associated with the condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the notification means is controlled by the notification control means so that the first suggestion information is notified. Since the random number information for determining the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is changed to the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. Then, even if the random number information is determined under other lottery conditions, the lottery result does not become the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit shifts to the special gaming state. If the lottery result is to be determined, the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit can be regarded as a lottery result different from the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. According to the gaming machine C2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery determination unit If the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be considered to be a lottery result different from the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, even if the lottery result determined by the The comparison can continue. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit are different, regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, simply by the comparison unit Compared with the case where the comparison is terminated, the opportunity for comparison by the comparison means can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the chances that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled appropriately.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C2, gaming machines A1 to A6, and gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means includes determination result information of determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination conditions Information is stored in association with the order of reception of the determination information, and the comparison means stores the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. In the comparison by the determination result information acquisition means for acquiring the determination that is not yet determined by the lottery determination means, and the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. A first comparison cancellation unit that cancels the comparison by the comparison unit, and the determination condition information acquired by the determination result information acquisition unit, Gaming machine C3 which characterized in that a comparison between sequentially drawing condition indicated by the determination condition information to old signal sequence, and a drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit acquires that the lottery determination corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, for the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means by the comparison means, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the comparison by the comparison means is stopped by the first comparison stop means. Here, in the determination of the lottery result that is first performed by the lottery determination unit after the special gaming state ends, the lottery condition becomes the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the special gaming state is completed, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order The lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is determined by the lottery determination means while the lottery conditions match with each other. Is likely to match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match when the comparison is performed, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In subsequent comparisons, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine C3, while there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit match each other, the comparison by the comparison unit can be continued. If the results match or are unclear, the comparison can be stopped. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when it becomes meaningless even if the comparison by the comparison means is performed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the determination information storage means includes determination result information of determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and determination conditions Information is stored in association with the order of reception of the determination information, and the comparison means stores the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. In the comparison by the determination result information acquisition means for acquiring the determination that has not been determined by the lottery determination means and the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. In addition, when the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, Second comparison cancellation means for canceling the comparison by stage, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order, A gaming machine C4, which compares the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit acquires that the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, with respect to the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared by the comparison means. In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition is changed to the special gaming state. When the lottery result to be transferred is indicated, the comparison by the comparison unit is stopped by the second comparison stop unit. Here, in the determination of the lottery result that is first performed by the lottery determination unit after the special gaming state ends, the lottery condition becomes the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the special gaming state is completed, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order The lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is determined by the lottery determination means while the lottery conditions match with each other. Is likely to match. According to the gaming machine C4, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is When the lottery result for shifting to the special game state is indicated, even when the determination condition information scheduled to compare the lottery conditions remains, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be further reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the gaming machines A1 to A6, and the gaming machines B1 to B2, the comparing means receives a condition received by the condition information receiving means immediately before the notification means is notified. A gaming machine C5, which compares a lottery condition indicated by information with a lottery condition indicated by determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification by the notification means is performed. Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison is performed by the comparison means, the comparison can be performed until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that the determination condition information is stored can be increased. Accordingly, the opportunity for comparison by the comparison means can be increased, and the opportunity for executing the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information associated with establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random number information storage means Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one stored random number information, and lottery for determining a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions from random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means A main unit for controlling a game and having a determination unit and a lottery condition setting unit for setting a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when a special game state to be shifted according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit is completed. Report either one of the control means, the first suggestion information that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and the second suggestion information that is different from the first suggestion information. And a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means, the main control means, when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery condition setting means The first lottery condition acquisition unit for acquiring the lottery condition set by the first lottery condition acquisition unit, and the lottery condition acquired by the lottery condition acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition unit. A determination including lottery result determination means for determining a lottery result when determined by the determination result, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, (2) Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery conditions acquired by the lottery condition acquiring means to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means is transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means. Determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information, determination result information for the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information in association with each other, and condition information for the main control means Condition information receiving means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the transmitting means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and lottery indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means The comparison means for comparing the condition and the notification by the notification means, the first suggestion information and the second indication based on the comparison result by the comparison means A gaming machine D1 comprising: a notification control means for controlling the notification means so that one of the hint information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine D1, when a predetermined starting condition is established, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions is lottery from the random number information. It is determined by the determination means, and the special gaming state is shifted according to the lottery result. Moreover, one of the 1st suggestion information which suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state is ended. In such a case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set by the lottery condition setting unit. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is established, the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and the lottery result determination means performs the lottery with the acquired lottery conditions. The lottery result when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination unit is determined. Then, determination information including determination result information indicating the lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. Further, when the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmitting unit. In the sub-control unit, when the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the determination information receiving unit, the determination result information of the received determination information is associated with the determination condition information. It is stored in the determination information storage means. The condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Is compared with the lottery conditions indicated by And when alerting | reporting by alerting | reporting means is performed, based on the comparison result of a comparison means, it controls by alerting | reporting control means so that one of 1st suggestion information and 2nd suggestion information may be alert | reported by alerting | reporting means. For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If it is refrained, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means, and therefore notification by the notification means is refrained. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine D1, based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is ended, the first suggestion information and the second One of the suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means can be notified using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means. It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means is wasted. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means can be handled appropriately.

  In any of the gaming machine D1, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the judgment information storage means is judgment result information of judgment information received by the judgment information receiving means. And the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the comparing means corresponds to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. Determination result information acquisition means for acquiring a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means; in comparison by the comparison means, lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information; and lottery conditions indicated by the condition information And the determination result information associated with the determination condition information corresponding to the lottery condition indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. A second comparison canceling unit for canceling the comparison by the comparison unit, and among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit, the lottery indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order The information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, and the notification control means determines the determination stored in the determination information storage means as a result of the comparison by the comparing means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information shifts to the special gaming state. If it shows a lottery result, the notification means is controlled so that the first suggestion information is notified.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the determination information storage unit stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information. Among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit, the determination result information acquisition unit acquires that the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, with respect to the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are compared by the comparison means. In the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition is changed to the special gaming state. When the lottery result to be transferred is indicated, the comparison by the comparison unit is stopped by the second comparison stop unit. Here, in the determination of the lottery result that is first performed by the lottery determination unit after the special gaming state ends, the lottery condition becomes the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the special gaming state is completed, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order The lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is determined by the lottery determination means while the lottery conditions match with each other. Is likely to match. According to the gaming machine D2, there is a high possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is When the lottery result for shifting to the special game state is indicated, even when the determination condition information scheduled to compare the lottery conditions remains, the comparison of the lottery conditions can be stopped. Therefore, since the number of comparisons by the comparison means can be suppressed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D2, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparing means receives the condition information immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means. A gaming machine D3, which compares the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the means with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means immediately before the notification by the notification means is performed. Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison is performed by the comparison means, the comparison can be performed until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that the determination condition information is stored can be increased. Accordingly, the opportunity for comparison by the comparison means can be increased, and the opportunity for executing the process using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be increased.

  Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, random number information storage means for storing a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means, and random number information storage thereof Based on the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, the storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the means, and the lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A lottery determination unit for determining the lottery condition, a lottery condition setting unit for setting the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit, and the lottery determination unit after the special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determination unit is completed. A lottery control means for controlling so that the determination based on the predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is performed. A main control means for performing control, and a notifying means for notifying suggestion information suggesting that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and a sub-control means controlled by an instruction from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means includes a first lottery condition obtaining means for obtaining a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the first lottery condition. A lottery result determination unit for determining a lottery result when the lottery condition acquired by the acquisition unit is determined by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determination unit. A determination information transmitter that transmits determination information including determination result information indicating the determined lottery result and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control means. A second lottery condition acquisition unit for acquiring the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit, and a condition for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the second lottery condition acquisition unit to the sub-control unit Information transmission means, and the sub-control means is transmitted by condition information reception means for receiving condition information transmitted by the condition information transmission means of the main control means, and by determination information transmission means of the main control means Determination information receiving means for receiving determination information, determination result information of determination information received by the determination information receiving means, determination information storage means for storing the determination condition information in association with each other, and storage in the determination information storage means Comparing means for comparing the lottery condition indicated by the determined judgment condition information with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means; and the judgment information Based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the receiving means, notification setting means for setting the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means, and the suggestion information by the notification means according to the setting by the notification setting means And a notification control means for controlling whether to notify the suggestion information by the notification means based on a comparison result by the comparison means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment, and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, lottery in one lottery condition set in advance among the plurality of lottery conditions based on the random number information The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and the special game state is entered according to the lottery result. In addition, suggestion information that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state is notified by the notification means, and when the special game state is ended, the determination by the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. It is controlled by a lottery control means so as to be performed under a predetermined condition. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is established, information for judging the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result judging means obtains the information. The lottery result in the case where the lottery condition determined by the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination unit is determined. Then, determination information including determination result information indicating the lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. Further, when the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmitting unit. In the sub control means, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. When the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the determination information receiving means, the determination result information of the determination information and the determination condition information are associated and stored in the determination information storage means. Is done. Also, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, it is determined by the notification determination unit whether the notification information is notified by the notification unit. When it is determined that the suggestion information is notified, the condition information reception unit The comparing means compares the lottery condition indicated by the received condition information with the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means. Based on the comparison result, the notification control unit controls whether or not the suggestion information is notified by the notification unit.

  When the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting unit, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit may change there. If the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit before the change of the lottery condition and the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit after the change of the lottery condition are inconsistent. And the lottery results may not match. Therefore, when the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means so far may not be trusted and may be refrained from using. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the notifying means is notified of the suggestion information based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means. Can be made. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit, the notifying unit can be notified of the suggestion information using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit. it can. Therefore, since the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be prevented from being wasted, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be preferably handled.

  In any of the gaming machine E1, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control means determines the result of the comparison by the comparing means When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information coincides with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the game machine E2 is controlled so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the notification control means is notified by the notification means. Control is performed by. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means The lottery result determined by the lottery determination result matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine E2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. In such a case, using the credible lottery result, the notification means can be notified of the suggestion information. Therefore, since the reliable result can be used among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E2, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control means is a result of the comparison by the comparing means, When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the game machine E3 is controlled so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the notification control unit prevents the suggestion information from being notified by the notification unit when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparison unit. Control is performed by. If the lottery conditions of the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery conditions for determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery results Since the lottery result determined by the determination means and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means may not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E3, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted In such a case, the unreliable lottery result is used so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the use of an unreliable one among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit can be more appropriately handled.

  Based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5 Display means for performing fluctuating effects including dynamic display of information, and when the determination setting information is received by the determination information receiving means, the notification setting means, based on the determination result information of the determination information, a plurality of In a variation effect, the information is provided with a notification determination unit that determines whether the notification unit notifies the suggestion information, and the lottery determination unit determines that the suggestion information is notified by the notification determination unit. Of the notifications in each variation effect performed based on the lottery result of the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means When the suggestion information is set to be notified by a stage, and the notification control means does not match the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of comparison by the comparison means In addition, the gaming machine E4 is controlled so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means in each variation effect performed by the display means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, when the determination information is received by the determination information receiving unit, whether the suggestion information is notified by the notification unit in a plurality of variation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information is determined by the notification determination unit. Determined. Here, when it is determined that the suggestion information is to be notified, among the determinations made by the lottery determination unit, based on the lottery result associated with the determination of the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit The setting is made by the notification setting means so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification means in each variation effect to be performed. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, the notification information is not notified by the notification means in each variation effect performed by the display means. In addition, control is performed by the notification control means. In the comparison by the comparison means, if the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means do not match. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit cannot be trusted, there is a transition to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determining unit, and then the lottery condition setting unit sets the lottery condition, There may be a possibility that the lottery condition of the judging means is changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparison is similarly unknown. If the lottery result determined by the result determination unit cannot be trusted, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted thereafter. According to the gaming machine E4, in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, and thereafter, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being notified by the notification means in each variation effect. Therefore, since it is possible to further suppress the use of an unreliable one among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit can be more appropriately handled.

  Based on the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5 Display means for performing fluctuating effects including dynamic display of information, wherein the determination information storage means includes determination result information of determination information received by the determination information receiving means and determination condition information; The notification setting means, when receiving the determination information by the determination information receiving means, in the plurality of variation effects based on the determination result information of the determination information. A lottery judgment means for determining whether the suggestion information is to be notified by the notification determination means; Among the determinations made by the means, the suggestion information is notified by the notification means in each variation effect performed based on the lottery result of the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage means. The comparison means includes a lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and the condition The lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the information receiving means is compared, and the notification control means determines the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of comparison by the comparison means. In the subsequent variation effects including the variation effect performed in response to the determination result information that is inconsistent. Gaming machine E5, wherein the suggesting information is used to control so as not to be notified by.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving unit and the determination condition information are stored in the determination information storage unit in association with the reception order of the determination information. When the determination information is received by the determination information receiving means, based on the determination result information of the determination information, the notification determining means determines whether the notification information is to be notified by the notification means in a plurality of variation effects. Here, when it is determined that the suggestion information is to be notified, among the determinations made by the lottery determination unit, based on the lottery result associated with the determination of the lottery result indicated by the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit The setting is made by the notification setting means so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification means in each variation effect to be performed. Then, among the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information in order from the oldest reception order is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information are inconsistent as a result of the comparison, the variation effect performed in response to the determination result information that is inconsistent is included. Control is performed by the notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means in each subsequent variation effect. In the comparison by the comparison means, if the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means do not match. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. Then, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit cannot be trusted, there is a transition to the special game state according to the lottery result of the lottery determining unit, and then the lottery condition setting unit sets the lottery condition, There may be a possibility that the lottery condition of the judging means is changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparison is similarly unknown. If the lottery result determined by the result determination unit cannot be trusted, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted thereafter. According to the gaming machine E5, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, It is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being notified by the notification means in each subsequent variation effect including the variation effect performed corresponding to the determination result information that is inconsistent. Therefore, among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining means, it is possible to use those that can be trusted and to suppress the use of those that cannot be trusted, so the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining means can be further reduced. It can be suitably handled.

  In the gaming machine E5, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparing means is configured to compare the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparing means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the gaming machine E6 is provided with a first comparison stop means for stopping the comparison by the comparison means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison unit, the comparison by the comparison unit is stopped by the first comparison stop unit. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information are inconsistent, and thereafter the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted, the comparison means You can stop the comparison. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when it becomes meaningless even if the comparison by the comparison means is performed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E6, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the notification control means is a result of the comparison by the comparing means, If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. For example, the gaming machine E7 is configured to control the suggestion information not to be notified by the notification means in each variation effect performed after the special game state.

  According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information as a result of the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information is the special game. If it shows the lottery result to shift to the state, the notification control means controls so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means in each variation effect performed after the special gaming state. When the special game state is entered in accordance with the lottery determination result of the lottery determination unit, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set by the lottery condition setting unit in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends. Therefore, there is a possibility that the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is changed. Therefore, in the next comparison, it is unclear whether or not the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the subsequent comparisons are similarly unknown. If the lottery result determined by the determination unit cannot be trusted, thereafter, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine E7, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information is the special gaming state. If the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted thereafter, the suggestion information can be prevented from being notified by the notification unit in each variation effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the use of an unreliable one among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining unit, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machine E7, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparison unit is configured to determine the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparison unit. The lottery condition indicated by the condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information match, and the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. In some cases, the gaming machine E8 is provided with a second comparison stop unit that stops the comparison by the comparison unit.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in the comparison by the comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, and the determination result associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition. When the information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the comparison by the comparison unit is stopped by the second comparison stop unit. Therefore, in the comparison by the comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the lottery result in which the determination result information associated with the determination condition information shifts to the special gaming state After that, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted, the comparison by the comparison unit can be stopped. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when it becomes meaningless even if the comparison by the comparison means is performed, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E5, the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparing means is configured to compare the determination condition information in the comparison by the comparing means. When the lottery condition indicated by the condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that matches the lottery condition indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. Transition determination means for determining whether or not the determination result information indicates a lottery result for transition to the special gaming state by the transition determination means, after the special gaming state has ended If the lottery condition determining means for determining the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means and the lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means, the condition information Gaming machine E9, characterized in that instead of drawing conditions, the comparison means by lottery condition is determined by the lottery condition determining means comprises a first comparator control means for controlling to continue the comparison shown.

  According to the gaming machine E9, when the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information matching the lottery condition is displayed. It is determined by the shift determination means whether the lottery result indicating the shift to the special game state is indicated. Here, if it is determined that the lottery result for the transition to the special gaming state is indicated, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting means after the special gaming state is ended is determined by the lottery condition determining means, Instead of the lottery conditions indicated by the information, the first comparison control means controls so that the comparison means continues the comparison based on the lottery conditions determined by the lottery condition determination means. When the special game state is entered in accordance with the lottery determination result of the lottery determination unit, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set by the lottery condition setting unit in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery determination unit after the special game state ends. . For this reason, after the special gaming state is over, it is unclear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. According to the gaming machine E9, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit after the special gaming state is ended is determined by the lottery condition determining unit, and the lottery condition determining unit determines instead of the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. Control is performed so that the comparison means continues the comparison according to the lottery conditions. Therefore, even after the special gaming state is finished, it becomes clear whether the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information. Therefore, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is displayed. You can distinguish whether you can trust. Therefore, since the number of credible results determined by the lottery result determination unit can be increased, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, each of the plurality of lottery conditions is the stored information acquisition means The lottery determination means indicates the lottery result to be determined according to the random number information acquired by the random number information, and the random number information from which the lottery result to be transferred to the special gaming state is determined is different for each lottery condition. The comparison unit is configured so that the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit until a comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match. The lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that does not match the lottery condition is the special gaming state. If it is determined by the determination result information determining means that the lottery result to be transferred to the special gaming state is determined by the determination result information determining means for determining whether the lottery result is to be transferred to A gaming machine E10, comprising: a second comparison control means for controlling the comparison means to continue the comparison.

  According to the gaming machine E10, each of the plurality of lottery conditions indicates a lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination unit according to the random number information acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, and shifts to a special gaming state. The random number information for determining the lottery result is configured to be different for each lottery condition. Then, until the comparison result between the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information does not match by the comparison means, the determination condition information for each determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Are compared with the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means. If the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the comparison means, the determination result information associated with the determination condition information that does not match the lottery condition is displayed. It is determined by the determination result information determination means whether the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state is indicated. Here, when it is determined that the lottery result indicating the transition to the special gaming state is indicated, the second comparison control unit performs control so that the comparison unit continues the comparison. Since the random number information for determining the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state is different for each of a plurality of lottery conditions, the random number information is determined under a certain lottery condition, and the lottery result is changed to the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. In this case, even if the random number information is determined under other lottery conditions, the lottery result does not become the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit do not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is in the special gaming state. The lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be regarded as a lottery result different from the lottery result shifted to the special gaming state. According to the gaming machine E10, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit are inconsistent, and the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery determination Even if there is a possibility that the lottery result determined by the means is inconsistent, if the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means can be considered to be a lottery result different from the lottery result to shift to the special gaming state, The comparison by the comparison means can be continued. Therefore, when the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition determined by the lottery determination unit do not match, the comparison is performed regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Compared with the case where the comparison by the means is terminated, the opportunity for the comparison by the comparison means can be increased. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the chances that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means can be handled appropriately.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the lottery condition setting means shifts to the special gaming state. In such a case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set to a predetermined lottery condition, and the lottery determination unit holds the determination of the random number information from the transition to the special gaming state until the end. The main control means is configured to determine whether or not the special gaming state is in the special gaming state when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state by the gaming state judgment means. A third lottery condition acquisition unit that acquires a lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit after the special gaming state is ended, the lottery result determination unit includes: If it is determined that the special gaming state is determined by the gaming state determination means, the random number information acquired when the predetermined start condition is established under the lottery conditions acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means is the lottery A gaming machine E11 characterized in that it determines a lottery result when determined by a determining means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, when transitioning to the special gaming state, the lottery condition setting unit sets the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit to the predetermined lottery condition, and after transitioning to the special gaming state until the end. The determination of random number information by the lottery determination means is suspended. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the special game state is determined by the game state determination means. If the special control state is determined, the lottery is performed after the special game state ends. The lottery conditions set by the condition setting means are acquired by the third lottery condition acquiring means. In addition, if it is determined by the gaming state determination means that the game state is the special gaming state, the random number information acquired when the predetermined start condition is established is determined by the lottery determination means under the lottery condition acquired by the third lottery condition acquisition means. The lottery result in the case of being determined by is determined by the lottery result determination means. Since the determination by the lottery determination means is suspended during the special gaming state, if a predetermined starting condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the determination of random number information accompanying the establishment is completed. , After the special gaming state ends. According to the gaming machine E11, when a predetermined start condition is established between the transition to the special game state and the end, the special game is not the predetermined lottery condition set during the special game state. The lottery result of the random number information associated with the establishment of the predetermined start condition can be determined by the lottery condition set for the lottery determination unit after the state ends. Therefore, even if a predetermined starting condition is established between the transition to the special gaming state and the end, the lottery result of the judgment performed by the lottery judging means can be accurately determined along with the establishment, so that the correct lottery The possibility that the result can be determined can be increased. Therefore, the opportunity which can handle the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means appropriately can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E11, gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machines A1 to A6, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines C1 to C5, the comparing means is immediately before being notified by the notifying means. The lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means. E12.

  According to the gaming machine E12, the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving unit and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit immediately before the notification by the notification unit is performed. Are compared by the comparison means. Therefore, when the comparison is performed by the comparison means, the comparison can be performed until immediately before the notification is performed by the notification means without performing the comparison immediately. The possibility that the determination condition information is stored can be increased. Therefore, since the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be handled by the comparison unit can be increased, the chance that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be suitably handled can be increased.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine F1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine F2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
  <Others>
  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine that performs a jackpot lottery with a game ball winning at a starting port and displays a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a display screen. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among these types of pachinko machines, for example, when a game ball is won at the starting port, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is predicted based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of winning. is there. The gaming state includes a low-probability state with a low probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning will be a big win, a high-probability state with a higher probability of being a big hit than the low-probability state, and the like. Then, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is predicted, and the prediction result is a jackpot, an effect that informs in advance that there is a high possibility of shifting to the jackpot, which is a special gaming state advantageous to the player (notice) Etc. have been devised to increase the player's expectation.
  In such a pachinko machine, when a game ball wins at the start opening, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is predicted based on the gaming state at the time of winning, but the actual jackpot lottery accompanying the winning is It is performed after the prediction and based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, when a game ball wins at the start opening, a random value is acquired with the winning, and if the game state of the pachinko machine at the time of winning is a low probability state, a lottery table for low probability On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a high probability state, the lottery table for high probability is referred to. Then, the lottery result is predicted based on the referenced table and the random value acquired with the winning.
  In addition, when a random value is acquired along with a prize, a big win lottery based on the random value is performed when a variable effect corresponding to the prize is started. In this jackpot lottery, unlike the prediction of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the lottery table is referred to based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery. More specifically, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine at the time of the lottery is a low probability state, the lottery table for the low probability is referred to, while if the gaming state at the lottery is a high probability state, the probability is high. The lottery table for time is referred. Then, the lottery result is determined based on the referenced table and the random value acquired with the winning. If the lottery result is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot ends.
  However, even if random numbers are acquired with winning, if random effects are being executed or if it is a big win, the random values acquired with the winning are accumulated in a predetermined storage area, Execution is suspended. If similar winnings occur repeatedly, for example, the big win lottery is held up to four times. And if the variation presentation and jackpot which are being executed are finished, if the reserved jackpot lottery remains, one of the oldest jackpot lotteries held is executed. Similarly, while the jackpot lottery is on hold, the pending jackpot lottery is sequentially executed one by one each time the on-going variation effect or jackpot ends. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-11-333089)
  Therefore, if a game ball is newly won at the starting gate and the jackpot lottery is on hold, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery associated with the new winning will be predicted, and then the pending jackpot lottery will be executed Therefore, the actual jackpot lottery with the new winning is performed. Therefore, if the pending jackpot lottery is executed and if any of the lottery results is a jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is set at the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that jackpot There is a risk that the gaming state changes before and after.
  If the game state changes here, an actual jackpot lottery with a new winning will be performed in the changed gaming state, so a lottery table referenced in the prediction of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with a new winning, and a new The lottery table to be referred to in the actual jackpot lottery associated with a special prize will change. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result will not match. There is a high possibility that an effect unrelated to the lottery result will be executed. Therefore, when there is a possibility that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the actual lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the prediction result may not match, it has been refrained from using the prediction result. As a result, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery was wasted.
  This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately handle the prediction result of the big hit lottery.
  <Means>
  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is acquired by a random number information acquisition unit that acquires random number information associated with the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the random number information acquisition unit. Random number information storage means for storing random number information, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and lottery in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions A lottery determination unit that determines the result from the random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition unit, and a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit when the special game state that shifts according to the lottery result of the lottery determination unit is completed Main control means for performing main control relating to the game, and first suggestion information that suggests a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state And a sub-control means for notifying one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information, and being controlled by an instruction from the main control means. The means includes a first lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means and the lottery conditions acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is established. Thus, the lottery result determination means for determining the lottery result when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination means, and the determination indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means It is set by determination information transmission means for transmitting determination information including result information and determination condition information indicating a lottery condition of the lottery result to the sub-control means, and the lottery condition setting means. A second lottery condition acquiring unit for acquiring a lottery condition; and a condition information transmitting unit for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery condition acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit to the sub control unit. The determination information receiving means for receiving the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means, the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, and the determination condition information are associated with each other. Determination information storage means for storing, condition information receiving means for receiving condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means, lottery conditions indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, The first comparison unit that compares the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage unit and the notification unit performs the first comparison. A first notification control unit configured to control the notification unit so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified based on a comparison result by the comparison unit;
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the first notification control unit determines the determination condition stored in the determination information storage unit as a result of the comparison by the first comparison unit. When the lottery condition indicated by the information does not match the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the notification means is controlled so that the second suggestion information is notified. .
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the first notification control unit determines the determination condition stored in the determination information storage unit as a result of the comparison by the first comparison unit. When the lottery condition indicated by the information matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, the lottery in which the determination result information associated with the determination condition information shifts to the special gaming state If it shows a result, the notification means is controlled so that the first suggestion information is notified.
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the determination information storage unit includes determination result information of determination information received by the determination information receiving unit; The determination condition information is stored in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the first comparison unit corresponds to the determination result information among the determination result information stored in the determination information storage unit. In the comparison by the determination result information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery result to be determined by the lottery determination means and the first comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information A first comparison stopping means for stopping the comparison by the first comparing means when the lottery conditions do not match, and the determination condition information acquired by the determination result information acquiring means It is intended to compare the drawing condition indicated by sequentially the determination condition information from the earliest to the received sequence, and a drawing condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means.
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 stores a plurality of random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and a plurality of random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means. Random number information storage means, storage information acquisition means for acquiring one random number information stored in the random number information storage means, and a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions. A lottery determination unit that is determined based on random number information acquired by the acquisition unit, a lottery condition setting unit that sets a lottery condition of the lottery determination unit, and a special gaming state that shifts according to a lottery result of the lottery determination unit Lottery control means for controlling so that the determination by the lottery determination means is performed under the predetermined lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means when it is finished. In addition, there are main control means for performing main control relating to the game, and notification means for notifying suggestion information that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special gaming state, and is controlled by an instruction from the main control means. Sub-control means, wherein the main control means obtains information for determining the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied. A lottery when the lottery determination unit determines the random number information acquired along with the acquisition of the lottery condition determined by the lottery condition acquisition unit and the information acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition unit A lottery result determination unit for determining the result, determination result information indicating the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit, and a determination condition indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result Determination information transmission means for transmitting determination information including information to the sub-control means, second lottery condition acquisition means for acquiring lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means, and second lottery condition acquisition means A condition information transmitting unit that transmits condition information indicating the lottery condition to be acquired to the sub-control unit, wherein the sub-control unit receives the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting unit of the main control unit Information receiving means; determination information receiving means for receiving determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means; determination result information for determination information received by the determination information receiving means; determination condition information; Are stored in association with each other, the lottery conditions indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means, and the condition information receiving means. Based on the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means, the second comparison means for comparing the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information to be set so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification means And whether or not to notify the suggestion information by the notification means based on the comparison result by the second comparison means when the suggestion information is notified by the notification means according to the setting by the notification setting means. And second notification control means for controlling the above.
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 6 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in which the second notification control unit determines the lottery condition and the condition information indicated by the determination condition information as a result of the comparison by the second comparing unit. When the lottery conditions shown in FIG. 4 coincide with each other, the notification means controls the suggestion information to be notified.
  The gaming machine described in the technical idea 7 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 or 6, wherein the second notification control unit determines the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the result of the comparison by the second comparing unit. When the lottery conditions indicated by the condition information do not match, the notification means is controlled so as not to notify the suggestion information.
  <Effect>
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when a predetermined start condition is established, random number information associated with the establishment is obtained by the random number information obtaining unit and stored in the random number information storage unit. When one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, a lottery result in one lottery condition set in advance among a plurality of lottery conditions is lottery from the random number information. It is determined by the determination means, and the special gaming state is shifted according to the lottery result. Moreover, one of the 1st suggestion information which suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state and the second suggestion information different from the first suggestion information is notified by the notification means, and the special game state is ended. In such a case, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit is set by the lottery condition setting unit. In the main control means, when a predetermined start condition is established, the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means are acquired by the first lottery condition acquisition means, and the lottery result determination means performs the lottery with the acquired lottery conditions. The lottery result when the random number information acquired with the acquisition of the condition is determined by the lottery determination unit is determined. Then, determination information including determination result information indicating the lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. Further, when the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmitting unit. In the sub-control unit, when the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the determination information receiving unit, the determination result information of the received determination information is associated with the determination condition information. It is stored in the determination information storage means. The condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means, and the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information and the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means Are compared by the first comparing means. Then, when the notification by the notification means is performed, the first notification control means is controlled so that one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the comparison result of the comparison means. The For example, when one of the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is notified by the notification means based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means is used. If it is refrained, it becomes difficult to select the suggestion information to be notified by the notification means, and therefore notification by the notification means is refrained. As a result, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is wasted. However, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first is based on the relationship between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set when the special gaming state is finished. One of the suggestion information and the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification means. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means, the notifying means can be notified using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining means. It can suppress that the lottery result determined by the means is wasted. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be handled appropriately.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the technical idea 1, the following effect is produced. That is, as a result of the comparison by the first comparing means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means are inconsistent. The notification means is controlled by the first notification control means so that the second suggestion information is notified. If the lottery conditions of the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery conditions for determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery results Since the lottery result determined by the determination means and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means may not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery determined by the lottery result determination unit When the result cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, when the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit cannot be trusted, the second suggestion information can be notified by the notification unit regardless of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the use of an unreliable lottery result, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be more appropriately handled.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect described in the technical idea 2, the following effect can be obtained. That is, as a result of the comparison by the first comparison means, when the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information stored in the judgment information storage means matches the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means, If the determination result information associated with the determination condition information indicates a lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the notification means is controlled by the first notification control means so that the first suggestion information is notified. . If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means The lottery result determined by the lottery determination result matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and is determined by the lottery result determination unit. When the lottery result can be trusted, if the reliable lottery result indicates the lottery result for shifting to the special gaming state, the first suggestion information can be notified to the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to make a notification by the notifying means using a reliable lottery result among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining means. In other words, since the trusted result among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining unit can be used, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit can be more appropriately handled.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is obtained. That is, the determination information storage means stores the determination result information of the determination information received by the determination information receiving means and the determination condition information in association with the reception order of the determination information, and the determination information storage means Of the stored determination result information, the determination result information acquisition unit acquires that the lottery result corresponding to the determination result information has not been determined by the lottery determination unit. Then, with respect to the acquired determination condition information, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information is compared with the lottery condition indicated by the condition information received by the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order by the first comparison means. When the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information do not match in the comparison by the first comparison unit, the comparison by the first comparison unit is stopped by the first comparison stop unit. Here, in the determination of the lottery result that is first performed by the lottery determination unit after the special gaming state ends, the lottery condition becomes the lottery condition indicated by the lottery information received by the condition information receiving unit. Therefore, among the determination condition information indicating the lottery result of the determination made by the lottery determination means after the special gaming state is completed, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the condition information receiving means in order from the oldest reception order The lottery result determined by the lottery determination means is determined by the lottery determination means while the lottery conditions match with each other. Is likely to match. On the other hand, if the lottery conditions do not match when the comparison is performed, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit may not match the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit. In subsequent comparisons, it is unclear whether the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit even if the lottery conditions match. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, while the possibility that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit coincides with the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, the comparison by the first comparison unit is performed. If the results of the lotteries match or are unclear, the comparison can be stopped. Therefore, since the comparison can be suppressed when it becomes meaningless even if the comparison by the first comparison means is performed, there is an effect that the control burden can be reduced.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, random number information is acquired by the random number information acquisition unit based on the establishment, and stored in the random number information storage unit. Then, when one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage unit is acquired by the stored information acquisition unit, lottery in one lottery condition set in advance among the plurality of lottery conditions based on the random number information The result is determined by the lottery determination means, and the special game state is entered according to the lottery result. In addition, suggestion information that suggests that there is a high possibility of shifting to the special game state is notified by the notification means, and when the special game state is ended, the determination by the lottery determination means is set by the lottery condition setting means. It is controlled by a lottery control means so as to be performed under a predetermined condition. In the main control means, when a predetermined starting condition is established, information for judging the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means is obtained by the first lottery condition obtaining means, and the lottery result judging means obtains the information. The lottery result in the case where the lottery condition determined by the lottery condition is determined by the lottery determination unit is determined. Then, determination information including determination result information indicating the lottery result and determination condition information indicating the lottery condition of the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the determination information transmitting unit. Further, when the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is acquired by the second lottery condition acquiring unit, the condition information indicating the acquired lottery condition is transmitted to the sub-control unit by the condition information transmitting unit. In the sub control means, the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the condition information receiving means. When the determination information transmitted by the determination information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the determination information receiving means, the determination result information of the determination information and the determination condition information are associated and stored in the determination information storage means. Is done. Also, based on the determination result information of the received determination information, it is determined by the notification determination unit whether the notification information is notified by the notification unit. When it is determined that the suggestion information is notified, the condition information reception unit The lottery condition indicated by the received condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information stored in the determination information storage means are compared by the second comparison means. Then, based on the comparison result, whether or not the suggestion information is notified by the notification means is controlled by the second notification control means.
  When the lottery condition is set by the lottery condition setting unit, the lottery condition of the lottery determination unit may change there. If the lottery condition changes, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit before the change of the lottery condition and the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit after the change of the lottery condition are inconsistent. And the lottery results may not match. Therefore, when the lottery conditions are set by the lottery condition setting means, the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means so far may not be trusted and may be refrained from using. In such a case, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is not used and is wasted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, on the basis of the relation between the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit and the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit, the suggestion information is notified by the notification unit. Can be informed. Therefore, even when it is refrained from using the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit, the notifying unit can be notified of the suggestion information using the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit. it can. Accordingly, since it is possible to suppress the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit from being wasted, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be appropriately handled.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, as a result of comparison by the second comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the determination condition information and the lottery condition indicated by the condition information The control is performed by the second notification control means so that the suggestion information is notified by the notification means when the two match. If the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination means, and the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery result determination means The lottery result determined by the lottery determination result matches the lottery result determined by the lottery determination unit, so that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit can be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 6, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit matches the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and is determined by the lottery result determination unit. When the lottery result can be trusted, the notifying means can be notified of the suggestion information using the reliable lottery result. Therefore, since the reliable result can be used among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining unit, there is an effect that the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit can be more appropriately handled.
  According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5 or 6, as a result of comparison by the second comparison means, the lottery condition indicated by the judgment condition information and the lottery indicated by the condition information Control is performed by the second notification control means so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means when the condition does not match. If the lottery conditions of the lottery results determined by the lottery result determination means and the lottery conditions for determination performed by the lottery determination means do not match, even if the random number information used for each determination is the same, the lottery results Since the lottery result determined by the determination means and the lottery result determined by the lottery determination means may not match, the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination means cannot be trusted. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 7, the lottery condition of the lottery result determined by the lottery result determination unit is different from the lottery condition of the determination performed by the lottery determination unit, and the lottery determined by the lottery result determination unit If the result cannot be trusted, the untrusted lottery result is used so that the suggestion information is not notified by the notification means. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the use of an unreliable one among the lottery results determined by the lottery result determining unit, it is possible to more appropriately handle the lottery result determined by the lottery result determining unit. .

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 third symbol display equipment 110 main controller (main controller)
113 audio lamp controller (sub-control hand stage)
114 Display control device ( variation display means )
203b Reserved ball storage area (random number information storage means)
223a Prefetch information storage area ( result information storage means)
223c jackpot after game state flag (lottery condition information storage means)
223j gaming state flag (lottery condition information storage means)
S206 random number information acquiring hand stage S401 stored information acquiring unit S402~S405 lottery determining means
S408, S413 variation type determination means S409~S411, S915, S916 drawing condition setting hand stage S501 ~ S507 lottery result estimation unit S511 ~ S513, S515 estimation information transmission unit
S902, S903 condition information transmission hand stage

Claims (2)

Display means having a predetermined display area;
Random number information acquisition means for acquiring random number information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Random number information storage means for storing random number information acquired by the random number information acquisition means;
Storage information acquisition means for acquiring one piece of random number information stored in the random number information storage means;
Lottery determination means for determining a lottery result of random number information acquired by the storage information acquisition means using one lottery condition among a plurality of lottery conditions set in advance;
Based on the lottery result of the lottery determination means, the fluctuation type determination means for determining the type of variable game to be executed in the display area;
Main control means for performing main control relating to the game, including lottery condition setting means for setting the lottery conditions of the lottery determination means when the special game state to be shifted according to the lottery result of the lottery determination means is completed When,
Means for performing a variation display with the variation game type determined by the variation type determination means, and a means for performing a specific effect over a plurality of variation games in order to give a predetermined suggestion to the player, In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means controlled by instructions from the control means,
The main control means includes
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the lottery condition set by the lottery condition setting unit is determined, and the random number information is determined by the lottery determination unit using the determined lottery condition. Lottery result estimation means for estimating the lottery result in the case,
In order to cause the sub-control means to determine an estimation result indicating a lottery result using the predetermined lottery condition estimated by the lottery result estimation unit when the predetermined start condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the plurality of times Estimated information transmitting means for transmitting estimated information for each predetermined starting condition to the sub-control means;
Condition information transmitting means for transmitting condition information indicating the lottery conditions set by the lottery condition setting means to the sub-control means,
The sub-control means includes
A result of storing estimation information transmitted by the estimation information transmitting means of the main control means, and storing result information indicating the lottery result of the random number information using the predetermined lottery condition specified from the received estimation information Information storage means;
Lottery condition information storage means for receiving the condition information transmitted by the condition information transmission means of the main control means, and storing the lottery conditions indicated by the received condition information;
If the lottery condition used for the determination of the result information stored in the result information storage means and the lottery condition stored in the lottery condition information storage means are different, the specific effect is performed. A game machine comprising: means for controlling the fluctuation display means so as not to break.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific effect is to display at least predetermined suggestion information in the display area over the plurality of games.

Images